home
***
CD-ROM
|
disk
|
FTP
|
other
***
search
/
OS/2 Shareware BBS: 3 Comm
/
03-Comm.zip
/
haotd1_1.zip
/
HACCESS.HLP
(
.txt
)
< prev
next >
Wrap
OS/2 Help File
|
1995-10-12
|
287KB
|
10,435 lines
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 1. General help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Welcome to the world of high-performance communications. With HyperACCESS you
get online fast with the hottest OS/2 graphical, 32-bit communications
software. Whether you communicate with mainframes, the Internet, remote PCs,
e-mail services, or bulletin boards, HyperACCESS can transform your
communications in just minutes.
From effortless installation to its intuitive user interface, you'll find
HyperACCESS surprisingly easy to use. For example, with CommSense technology
(pat. pending) you just enter phone numbers, and HyperACCESS figures out
settings for you. If you really need special settings, you can continue to
specify communications parameters manually.
HyperACCESS has the depth and power necessary to handle your needs, whether
they're beginning or advanced. You'll find its wealth of features makes your
communications fast, efficient, and productive. And you can customize
HyperACCESS to your taste and applications using keyboard macros or REXX
programs.
Connect at rates up to 57,600 bps through COM1-COM4 with standard OS/2 drivers,
or up to 115,200 bps with the included shareware COM driver; and you can
transfer files with Zmodem, Ymodem, Ymodem-G, 1K Xmodem, CompuServe B+, Kermit,
and HyperProtocol (the fastest of all). Now, as you download graphics files,
you'll see them gradually display, so you can keep receiving those you like and
cancel those you don't.
In addition to these outstanding features, you get 1000s of ready-to-call BBSs,
100s of Internet service providers, and 100s of Fidonet nodes. You can even get
larger, updated lists free from Hilgraeve!
If you're an experienced OS/2 user, you'll have an intuitive feel for
HyperACCESS, because it conforms to all OS/2 standards. If this is your first
venture into an OS/2-based program, you'll find that knowledge you gain using
HyperACCESS makes it easier to learn and use other programs under OS/2.
New OS/2 users will find a description and definition of OS/2 terms in the
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 3, HyperACCESS for Novice OS/2 Users. Refer
to Chapter 2, Installing HyperACCESS and Placing Your First Call, to get
HyperACCESS up and running quickly.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2. Dialogs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A list of dialogs in HyperACCESS for OS/2.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.1. 1K Xmodem Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
1K Xmodem is a 1024-byte packet, error-correcting protocol similar to Ymodem,
except that it can transfer only one file at a time. Unlike Ymodem, 1K Xmodem
doesn't transfer filenames. Some remote systems that support 1K Xmodem refer to
it as Ymodem.
The settings are:
o Error-checking
This group box provides three radio buttons to specify the error-checking
method. The default is Auto, which adapts automatically to the
error-checking method of the remote system. CRC and Checksum are the two
alternative error- checking methods available with this protocol. Certain
systems will require that you set this parameter to Checksum.
o Seconds to wait to receive each packet
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number of seconds your PC
waits for each packet to begin. This is normally set to 10. With slower
systems, such as CompuServe, you might need to set this as high as 30.
o Seconds to wait to receive each byte
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number of seconds your PC
waits for each byte in the packet. This is normally set to 5. With slower
systems, such as CompuServe, you might need to set this as high as 10.
o Attempts to send each packet
Use the spin button or edit field to set how many times your PC
retransmits (or requests retransmission of) each packet. Normally this is
4. You might want to increase this value for particularly noisy telephone
lines.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.2. Add Caller ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Add Callers dialog in host mode enables you to enter new callers and their
privileges. The information you enter in this dialog is:
o First name
The caller's first name. Control characters and blanks aren't permitted,
and upper and lowercase characters are equivalent.
o Last name
The caller's last name. Control characters and blanks aren't permitted,
and upper and lowercase characters are equivalent.
o Password
The caller's password. Control characters and blanks aren't permitted,
and upper and lowercase characters are equivalent.
o Callback number
This check box with its associated edit field lets you enter a telephone
number that HyperACCESS will call after this user successfully logs on.
Upon successful logon, host mode hangs up, waits a moment, and then calls
this telephone number one time. You can use this capability to provide an
additional level of security, or to reverse telephone charges. Once
reconnected, the caller can use the privileges you've assigned.
o Privileges
This group box enables you to specify access privileges for this caller.
Note: You can change default values for these settings by clicking
Default Privileges... in the Passwords dialog.
Select the check boxes corresponding to the privileges you want to grant.
- Download files from Host (Type, Send, Hsend, etc.)
Select this check box to let callers enter commands to send files
from your computer to their computer. It's the caller's
responsibility to issue the correct command depending on the
protocol.
- Upload files to Host (Rec, Hrec, Zrec, etc.)
Select this check box to let callers enter commands to send files
from their computer to your computer. It's the caller's
responsibility to issue the correct command depending on the
protocol.
- File management (Copy, Del, etc.)
Select this check box to let the caller use COPY, DELETE, RENAME,
MKDIR, and RMDIR. To prevent tampering with your files and
directories, leave this check box unselected.
- Limit access to
Select this check box to limit the caller's access to a particular
drive or directory. Enter the drive and directory path in the
associated edit field, or use the Browse... push button to help you
locate the path.
This becomes the caller's default location, and commands issued
affect only this drive and directory.
Note: The caller also has access to all subdirectories of the
specified drive and directory.
The Next and Previous push buttons are unavailable for adding callers.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.3. ASCII Receiving ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the ASCII Receiving properties sheet to specify options that apply only to
normal terminal interaction with remote systems. These options don't affect
file transfer protocols.
The check boxes on this sheet are:
o Append line feeds to incoming line ends
This check box forces a CR and LF at the end of each line. The default is
to leave the lines as received. Lines sent to you by most remote systems
will already end with CR and LF.
o Force incoming data to 7-bit ASCII
Converts 8-bit data characters to standard ASCII by replacing the eighth
bit with a zero.
By setting this check box, you can suppress spurious extended ASCII
characters caused by line noise or incorrect parity and/or bits per
character settings. With systems that send extended ASCII characters,
leave this check box unselected. The default is unselected.
Note: HyperACCESS ignores this setting when you use the ANSI emulator
because it must support graphic characters that use the eighth bit.
o Echo incoming data to sender
The default is no echo. When set, this option transmits every received
character back to the remote system. You may want to select this check
box when you're communicating terminal-to-terminal.
o Wrap lines that exceed terminal's width
When off, discards characters beyond the terminal's maximum line length.
When on, the default, long lines appear on multiple terminal lines.
o Show hex value of nonprinting characters
The default is off. When on, control characters, escape sequences, and
screen control codes no longer control your screen; instead they display
as hexadecimal values in square brackets.
o Tab spacing for incoming text
The default replaces each tab character with eight contiguous spaces. Use
the spin button or associated edit field to change the number of
contiguous spaces used to convert a tab character. Set this value to zero
to turn conversion off.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.4. ASCII Sending ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the ASCII Sending properties sheet to specify options that apply only to
normal terminal interaction with remote systems. For example, this sheet you
can specify whether or not to append line feed characters to the end of
outgoing lines. You can also specify line and character delays to correct
problems with lost characters. These options don't affect file transfer
protocols.
o Send line ends with line feeds
Default is CR only. Check this box to have HyperACCESS send a CR and LF
at the end of each line.
o Expand blank lines to include a space
The default permits null lines (two CRs without any intervening
characters). Check this box to force HyperACCESS to always include at
least one space character between two CRs.
o Echo typed characters locally
The default is no echo. When set, this option displays transmitted
characters in the terminal area. Select this option when you're
communicating with remote systems that expect you to be operating in half
duplex (sometimes called echoplex) mode.
o After sending each line, wait for character
The default is no waiting. However, if this option is selected, the
default character causes HyperACCESS to wait for an echoed 0Dh (CR)
character before sending the next line. Most remote systems operate in
full duplex mode, so all characters sent are echoed back. Waiting for CR
can help synchronize transmission to slower remote systems.
o Convert outgoing tabs to
The default is no conversion. However, if checked, the default is 8
spaces. You can change the number of spaces using the spin button or
associated edit field.
o Delay after each character
The default is zero milliseconds. If you experience loss of characters
when performing ASCII transmissions to slow remote systems, increasing
this setting may improve transmission integrity. Use the spin button or
associated edit field to change the number of milliseconds.
o Delay after each line
The default is zero milliseconds. If you experience loss of characters at
the beginning of lines when performing ASCII transmission to slow remote
systems, increasing this setting may improve transmission integrity. Use
the spin button or associated edit field to change the number of
milliseconds.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.5. ANSI Terminal Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The ANSI emulator supports American National Standards Institute displays.
HyperACCESS completely supports the ANSI display standard. This emulator is
most often used with computerized bulletin boards and other remote systems that
send graphics characters or ANSI color codes.
The ANSI Terminal Settings dialog has only one setting: IBM PC scan codes
(Doorway). Selecting this check box causes the ANSI emulator to send PC scan
codes (generated by your keyboard) when you press keys, rather than the ASCII
values normally associated with the keys. This option facilitates remote
execution of programs or BBSs that support Doorway modes.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.6. Button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Button dialog of the Automation/Buttons menu choice to assign to
buttons keyboard macros, HyperACCESS commands, automatically generated or
manually created REXX programs, or any .EXE program that uses HAPI.
The edit fields and buttons in this dialog are:
o Button
This group box contains two radio buttons that enable you to specify
whether the button has an icon or text on its face. It also has two push
buttons associated with the Icon option.
- Icon
You can pick one of the predefined icons in the scrollable area, or
you can click the Import Icon... button to insert your own graphic
in the scrollable area.
- Text
Displays the insertion pointer in the associated edit field. Any
text you enter appears on the sample button in the dialog. When you
click OK, this text appears on the button in the button bar.
- Import Icon...
This option is dimmed or grayed out until you first select the Icon
button option. Clicking this button displays the Import Icon dialog.
Use this dialog to specify an icon from an .ICO file. Click View...
to display the button icon without committing to use it.
- Delete
This option is dimmed or grayed out (unavailable) unless you first
select a button that you added. You can't delete any of the
predefined icons.
o Action
This group box has three radio buttons with associated edit fields that
enable you to define what type of action to assign to a button. You must
select a radio button and enter text in an edit field or make a selection
from the associated drop-down list (or Browse... push button) for that
action type.
- Macro text
This radio button and its associated edit field enable you to define
a macro (a sequence of keystrokes or key combinations). Simply press
the keys (or combination of keys) in the sequence you want them
issued. To assign Tab, Enter, Esc, Backspace, Delete, or other
cursor control keys, first press Insert, followed by the desired
key.
- Command
Use this radio button to make a selection from the drop-down list of
HyperACCESS commands. You can assign only one command to a key
combination. Commands in the list include all HyperACCESS menu
selections for the current panel. Assigning a command to a button
enables you to perform any operation with a single click.
- Program
This radio button and its associated edit field, drop-down list, and
Browse... push button enable you to specify a program filename and
path. The program file can be C or REXX language, or an .EXE file
using HAPI.
o Help text
Use this edit field to define help text for a button. This text phrase is
displayed whenever you hold the mouse pointer over the button for a
couple of seconds.
Selecting OK without specifying an action displays a warning dialog that
enables you to exit or return to define an action. If the button has the same
text label as an existing button, you will see a warning dialog that asks if
you want to replace the current action.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.7. Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Buttons dialog displays existing system and user-defined buttons that
invoke macros, commands, or programs. The ability to define macros and assign
them to buttons provides provides a simple, straightforward, nonprogramming
method to automate commonly used words, phrases, and key combinations.
You can define or modify system-defined buttons that appear in the button bar.
The list and buttons in this dialog are:
o Existing buttons
This scrollable list shows existing buttons that have macros, commands,
or programs defined. Entries in the list include the word Macro, Program,
or Command to indicate what type of action the button represents. To
modify or delete an entry, select it and click the appropriate button.
o Modify..
Use this push button to modify an existing macro, command, program, or
button assignment. After selecting an entry in the list, clicking this
button displays the Modify dialog.
o New...
Use this push button to define a new macro, command, or program for a
button. Clicking this button displays the New dialog.
o Delete
Use this push button to delete an existing button assignment. After
selecting an entry in the list, clicking this button displays a warning
dialog so you can confirm your selection.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.8. Capture to File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this dialog to specify a file for receiving and storing the record of your
interaction with the remote system.
The information displayed, and the parameters and options of the dialog, are:
o Directory
The full path of the current directory.
o File
Use this drop-down list to specify a name and path for storing the
captured file. Use the Browse... button to help you find the location.
If you've previously specified a default capture file in the File Usage
properties sheet, or you've previously used a captured file for this
session, HyperACCESS displays that filename in the drop- down history
list box.
The drop-down list displays the last six files used for capture. You can
edit the path or name in the list box, select a file from the drop-down
list, or use the Browse... push button to select a capture file.
o If File Already Exists
This group box has the following four radio buttons:
- Append
If the file exists, this selection adds new session interaction to
the end of the current file. If the file doesn't exist, HyperACCESS
creates it.
- Overwrite
If the file exists, this selection deletes the old file and creates
a new capture file. If the file doesn't exist,HyperACCESS creates
it.
- Rename by date
HyperACCESS creates filenames using the extension specified, plus
the first letter of the filename with date/sequence appended. The
date/sequence format is MMDD999, where MM is the month (values 01 to
12), DD is the day (values 01 to 31), and 999 is a sequence number
from 000 to 999 for the files created on that date.
- Rename sequentially
Appends a sequence number from 0 to 999 to the end of the filename.
If the name is already at its maximum length (254 or 8), the
sequence number replaces characters at the end of the name.
o Capture Mode
This section has the following four radio buttons:
- Characters
Captures all incoming data except control or escape sequences.
- Lines
Captures each line when the carriage return at its end is received.
It also captures the line you're on when you stop or suspend
capturing.
- Screens
Captures whatever passes into the Backscroll Buffer, plus the
terminal screen when you stop or suspend capturing.
- Raw data
Captures all incoming data, including control or escape sequences.
o Make these the default settings
This check box appears at the bottom of the dialog. Selecting it makes
the file specified the default capture file, with the options you've
selected the default settings.
o Start
This push button returns to the Terminal panel and begins capturing data
according to selected options.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.9. Capture to Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this dialog to specify how HyperACCESS captures interactive information for
printing, and whether it releases the information to the printer by page or by
session. Releasing the printer by session is important if you're printing to a
network printer.
The information displayed in this dialog, and its parameters and options, are:
o Printer
Displays the current printer. This is either the system default printer
or the printer selected using the Print Setup dialog.
o Characters
Prints all incoming data except escape sequences.
o Lines
Prints each line when the carriage return at its end is received (the
default). It also prints the line you're on when you stop or suspend
printing, unless that line is blank.
o Screens
Prints the entire screen whenever the remote system clears the screen or
you stop or suspend printing.
o Make these the default settings
This check box appears at the bottom of the dialog. Selecting it makes
the options you've selected the default settings.
o Start
This push button initiates printing on the selected printer using the
options specified.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.10. Colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Colors properties sheet to select colors for the Terminal panel text
and background. You can choose the color of the terminal text and background
from 16 predefined selections. To select a color, click it. Sample Text
previews your selections so you can try other combinations before selecting OK.
The colors you define here become default colors for this phonebook entry. If
you connect with a host computer that sends color redefinition codes to
HyperACCESS, your screen colors will change.
Note: HyperACCESS doesn't support dragging colors from the OS/2 Color Palette
because the Terminal panel must respond to color commands received from host
computers.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.11. Communications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Communications properties sheet to define how HyperACCESS connects to
the remote system. The edit fields and buttons that appear on this sheet depend
on the connection you define during HyperACCESS installation or later by using
the Change... button in the Connect Via group box. You can specify one or more
phone numbers and communications settings.
o Connect Via
This group box at the top of the Communications sheet is common to all
connection types. It displays the name and type of the current
connection. Other entries on the sheet vary depending on the connection
type. To change this information or specify a new connection, select the
Change... button. The Existing Connections dialog is displayed.
o Communications Settings
This group box at the bottom of the Communications sheet is common to all
connection types. It displays the current communications settings. You
can make changes by clicking on the Change... button to display the
Communications Settings dialog.
The edit fields in the Communications properties sheet vary, depending upon
the type of connection.
MODEM
When the connection type is through a modem, the following information
applies.
o Phone number
Use this edit field to enter a primary telephone number. If you always
call the same phone number to access a remote system, it's best to enter
the phone number. However, there may be advantages to leaving this field
blank.
Selecting a phonebook entry that doesn't have a phone number displays a
warning dialog followed by the Communications dialog to obtain the
number. This dialog is equivalent to the Communications properties sheet.
o If busy, try
o If still busy, try
These two edit fields enable you to enter alternate telephone numbers for
connection types that require a phone number. If the primary telephone
number is busy, HyperACCESS attempts to call these numbers. It cycles
through each number in turn until it has dialed the number of times
specified in the Dialing Details dialog.
o Phone Number Prefix/Suffix
This group box displays a selected prefix or suffix or <none>. To specify
or select a prefix or suffix, click the Change... button to display the
Phone Number Prefix and Suffix dialog. HyperACCESS dials the prefix
before the telephone number and the suffix after the telephone number.
DIRECT CABLE
When the connection type is through a direct cable, the Communications
properties sheet displays only two group boxes with corresponding Change...
push buttons: Connect Via and Communications Settings.
TCP/IP
When the connection type is through TCP/IP, only three parameters are
displayed:
o Connect Via
As described earlier.
o Remote IP Address
Enter a remote IP address in this edit field. For example, you could
enter LOCIS.LOC.GOV for the Library of Congress. You can also enter a
numeric address, such as 19.1.5.255 to access a specific IP node.
o Port Number
Enter the remote port number that you want to use for the connection.
Most systems use port 23 (the default) for telnet access.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.12. Communications Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This dialog is displayed when you select the Change... button in the
Communications Settings group box on the Communications properties sheet.
The drop-down lists, check boxes, and push button in this dialog are:
o Baud rate
This group box has two radio buttons that enable you to specify whether
this phonebook entry is to Use modem default baud rate for the connection
or a unique baud rate. To specify a unique baud rate, select the Connect
At radio button and pick a baud rate from the drop-down list. The
drop-down list provides common transmission rates between 300 and 115200
baud.
The baud rate parameter determines the maximum transfer speed in bits per
second (bps) between your PC and modem.
With many modems, you can set a higher baud rate than the modem actually
uses to exchange data with remote systems; see your modem manual. This is
particularly beneficial with modems that support data compression.
o Settings (data, parity, stop)
This drop-down list provides the three most common character settings for
data bits, parity, and stop bits (8-None-1, 7-Even-1, and 7-Odd-1). The
fourth choice, Auto-detect, automatically determines appropriate settings
using Hilgraeve's unique CommSense technology (patent pending). Use the
Custom... push button to display the Custom dialog to choose other data,
parity, and stop bit settings.
o Break duration
This drop-down list box provides choices for the break signal duration in
milliseconds. You can enter any value. This number determines the length
of the break signal HyperACCESS generates when you press the "break" key
for the terminal you're emulating.
Note: In most cases, the terminal emulator's break key is the same as the
PC Break key. See HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal
Emulator Characteristics.
o Software Flow Control
Use the check boxes to turn on software handshaking for receiving and/or
sending. The defaults are on. Use the drop-down combo boxes to specify
the Xon and Xoff characters. The defaults are the standard ASCII Xon/Xoff
characters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.13. CompuServe Terminal Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This emulator simplifies file transfers with CompuServe B+ protocol and is used
solely with CompuServe Information Service. With this emulator, you can
initiate file transfers just by commanding CompuServe to send or receive files
(you don't need to select Transfer/Send or Transfer/Receive). When using this
emulator, you should configure CompuServe to treat your computer as an ANSI
terminal (to begin the configuration process, enter GO TERMINAL at the
CompuServe prompt).
There are no emulator-unique settings for the CompuServe emulator.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.14. CompuServe B+ Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This protocol is for use with CompuServe B+ protocol on the CompuServe
Information Service. The CompuServe B+ protocol supports both single- and
multiple-file transfers, and is an error-correcting protocol. All you need to
do is command CompuServe to send or receive the desired files. HyperACCESS
automatically transfers the files. To use this protocol, you must be using the
CompuServe emulator.
The settings are:
o Protocol Type
Select either CompuServe B+ (the default) or Old B by clicking on the
appropriate radio button.
o Packet size
Use the drop-down list to enter the packet size used for transmission.
The list has potential packet sizes in 128-byte increments. The default
packet size is 512. The minimum is 128 and maximum is 1024.
o Quoting level
This drop-down list has four choices:
- Standard quoting
- Minimal quoting (the default)
- Extended quoting
- Maximum quoting
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.15. Connect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This status dialog is displayed when HyperACCESS is attempting to connect to
the system you have asked to call. The name of the system and other information
about the phonebook entry is displayed at the top. Dialing information is also
displayed.
This dialog reflects information and settings you have specified in the entry's
Properties settings notebook. You can change the settings in the Properties
notebook. The only choices you can make in this dialog are the following:
o Show modem commands
Check this box to have HyperACCESS display modem commands on the Terminal
panel after this dialog is removed. Cancel
Select this button to stop attempting to connect.
o Redial Now.
Select this button to override the Redial after setting and redial
immediately.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.16. Connect Through ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This dialog is displayed when you select the Change... button on the Connection
dialog. (There might be some intervening dialogs, depending upon the type of
connnection.) The contents of this dialog depend on which type of connection
you have selected.
MODEM OR MODEM POOL
For a modem or modem pool connection, the information in the Connect Through
dialog is the following:
o Type of Interface
Select a type of interface from the drop-down list.
o COM Port
Select a COM port from the list, or click the Don't Know... button to
have HyperACCESS list and test all available COM ports on your computer.
After the test, it shows you the available ports and specifies if any
respond to modem commands.
You can select a COM port from the list or enter in the edit field a
non-standard port name used by a third-party communications driver.
o OK
Note: For information on configuring OS/2 to support COM1-COM4, see
Configuring COM ports.
When you've selected an interface type and COM port, click OK. All
intermediate dialogs disappear, and the Existing Connections dialog
reappears with the new connection defined as specified.
DIRECT CABLE
For a direct cable connection, the information in the Connect Through dialog
is the following:
o Type of Interface
Select a type of interface from the drop-down list. Choices in this list
include:
- Standard COM Port
- OS/2 Shared Port
Select a COM port from the list, or click the Don't Know... button to
have HyperACCESS list and test all available COM ports on your
computer. After the test, it shows you the available ports and
specifies if any respond to modem commands. For a direct cable
connection, pick a port that indicates no modem.
Note: You can select a COM port from the list or enterin the edit
field a non-standard port name used by a third-party communications
driver.
o OK
o When you've selected an interface type and COM port, click OK. All
intermediate dialogs disappear, and the Existing Connections dialog
reappears with the new connection defined as specified.
TCP/IP
For a TCP/IP connection, the Connect Through dialog displays only the Type of
Interface drop-down list. By default, HyperACCESS supports only IBM TCP/IP in
the list. If you install third-party TCP/IP support, it appears in the list.
When you've selected an interface type, click OK. All intermediate dialogs
disappear, and the Existing Connections dialog reappears with the new
connection defined as specified.
Related Information
Configuring COM ports.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.17. Connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The appearance of the Connection dialog depends upon which type of connection
you selected.
MODEM OR MODEM POOL
For Modem or Modem Pool connections, the information is the following:
o Modem name
Displays the list of modems available for your use. You can change the
modem using the drop-down list.
o Not Listed...
If you don't find the name of your modem in the list, select the Not
Listed button. The Name Modem dialog is displayed. You can enter the
official name of your modem or make up a name. The name you enter is
added to the HyperACCESS list of modems.
Note: Modems defined using the Not Listed... button are stored in the
file USERMDM.TXT. You can change the name, setup strings, and settings
for these modems by editing that file directly. The beginning of the file
lists guidelines for the proper format of modem entries within the file.
This feature provides additional flexibility in managing user-defined
modems beyond what can be achieved directly through the HyperACCESS user
interface. For example, you can provide a USERMDM.TXT file to other
HyperACCESS users so they can use modems you have defined. The file also
enables you to specify additional settings beyond those available in the
user interface, such as the message your modem displays when it
establishes a connection.
When you return to this Connection dialog after adding a not-listed
modem, you should enter the setup strings and settings needed for this
modem. When you leave this Connection dialog, these settings become the
defaults for this modem. In the future, selecting the Restore button in
this dialog will revert to these settings.
o Connect Through
The Connect Through group box indicates the current physical connection.
To change the physical connection, click the Change... button in this
group. The Connect Through dialog is displayed.
o Modem Setup
Modem setup includes initialization strings, the default baud rate, and a
hardware handshaking option.
- 1st - 4th string (initialization strings)
The modem selected determines the default modem initialization
strings. You can change these defaults if necessary. Commands may be
broken into two or more initialization strings to avoid exceeding
the modem's maximum line length. In this dialog, you can enter up to
four setup strings. Each string can be up to 40 characters long.
- Default baud rate
The default OS/2 communications driver supports speeds up to 57600
bps. If you use another driver, refer to its documentation for
information on its capabilities.
To support modems that incorporate data compression, you should
generally set this value to the next baud rate above your modem's
rated speed. For example, with 9600 or 14400 modems, you should set
to 19200, and with 28800 modems, you should set to 34800.
- Use hardware handshaking for flow control
Hardware handshaking is the process by which a modem indicates to
another modem that it is ready to accept data.
Flow control is a means by which a computer or device that is
receiving data can command the computer or device that is sending
data to suspend and resume sending. Typical means of flow control
are XON/XOFF and hardware handshaking.
If your modem's baud rate is 9600 or higher, this box should be
checked.
DIRECT CABLE
For direct cable connections, the information is the following:
o Connect Via
The Connect Via group box indicates the current physical connection. To
change the physical connection, click the Change... button in this group.
The Connect Through dialog is displayed.
o Use hardware handshaking
Hardware handshaking is the process by which a computer indicates to
another computer that it is ready to accept data. For direct cable
connections, this box should be checked.
TCP/IP
For TCP/IP connections, the Connect Through dialog is displayed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.18. Copy to File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Copy to File dialog to specify options for copying incoming information
to a file. The edit field, options, and buttons are:
o Copy to file
This drop-down combo box displays up to six files previously used for
copy operations. Either enter a filename or select one from the drop-down
list.
o Browse...
Use this push button as an alternative to the drop-down list to specify a
file for the copy operation.
o If File Already Exists
Use this group box to specify whether you want to append or overwrite the
file if it already exists.
o OK
Use this push button to initiate the copy operation and close the dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.19. Copy Which Template? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A template is required for a list file so that HyperACCESS can properly extract
the names, phone numbers, and other information. This dialog lists files for
which templates have been defined. You select a template from this list to copy
to the new list file, and then select Copy Template. The Lists panel will open
the new list file and display the Template dialog with settings copied from the
list file you selected here. When the Template dialog is displayed, you may
change the copied settings, accept them as they are, or cancel the copying of
the template.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.20. Custom (data-parity-stop) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the sliders in the Custom dialog to enter specific values provided by the
remote system's administrator for data, parity, and stop bits per character.
Note: After you choose the settings and click OK, these settings show up in the
Settings (data-parity-stop) drop-down list as "custom." If you later choose a
standard setting or auto-detect from the drop-down list, the custom setting
disappears.
The settings are:
o Data bits
Specify the number of bits per character. The options include 8, 7, 6,
and 5. Most systems use 8.
o Parity
Specify the type of character parity. The options are None, Odd, Even,
Mark, and Space.
Note: When using Odd, Even, Mark, or Space parity, you usually need to
set Data bits to 7.
o Stop bits
Specify the number of stop bits per character. The choices are 1, 1.5,
and 2. Most systems use 1 stop bit.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.21. Default Privileges ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Privileges entered in this dialog are the defaults for callers added through
the Add Passwords dialog and for new callers when permitted in the host mode
Passwords dialog.
o Download files from Host (Type, Send, Hsend, etc.)
This check box lets callers enter commands to send files from your
computer to their computer. It's the caller's responsibility to issue the
correct command depending on protocol.
o Upload files to Host (Rec, Hrec, Zrec, etc.)
This check box lets callers enter commands to send files from their
computer to your computer. It's the caller's responsibility to issue the
correct command, depending on the protocol.
o File management (Copy, Del, etc.)
Select this check box to let the caller use COPY, DELETE, RENAME, MKDIR,
and RMDIR. To prevent tampering with your files and directories, leave
this check box unselected.
o Limit access to
Select this check box to limit the caller's access to a particular drive
or directory. Enter the drive and directory path in the associated edit
field, or use the Browse... push button.
This becomes the caller's default location, and commands issued affect
only this drive and directory.
Note: The caller also has access to all subdirectories of the specified
drive and directory.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.22. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Delete... menu choice displays this warning dialog with the following
choices:
o Remove from Phonebook
Removes the entry from the phonebook, but doesn't delete its file from
the disk.
o Delete from Disk
Removes the entry from the phonebook and deletes its file from the disk.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.23. Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Description properties sheet to change the phonebook entry name, pick
an icon, and enter a brief comment.
The edit fields and buttons on this sheet are:
o Name
Use this edit field to enter or change the name for the phonebook entry.
In Icon view, this name appears under the icon. You can enter up to three
lines of text for an entry name.
o Icon
Use this scrollable region to select an icon to represent the phonebook
entry in Icon view. The selected icon has a border around it. To change a
selection, simply click another icon. You can add icons by clicking the
Import Icon... button.
o Delete
Use this button to delete icons that you added using the Import Icon...
button. If you select any other icon, this button is unavailable (grayed
out).
o Notes
Use this scrollable edit field to add any textual information about the
phonebook entry. For example, you might want to keep the system
administrator or help desk phone number in this field.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.24. Dialing Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Dialing Details... push button on the Communications properties sheet
displays the Dialing Details dialog. HyperACCESS specifies reasonable defaults
for each of these settings. Settings in the upper group box of this dialog
affect only this session, and are independent of settings used when calling
other systems. Settings in the lower group box affect calls to all phonebook
entries.
When Dialing This Phonebook Entry
o Append these commands to modem setup
Use this edit field to specify special commands required to configure
your modem for communication with this particular remote system. It is
unnecessary to include the initial AT command, since HyperACCESS always
prefixes AT to this command string if you leave it off.
o Wait for carrier
This spin button and edit field enable you to specify the number of
seconds you want the modem to wait for the remote system to answer the
call and issue a carrier signal. HyperACCESS waits for the earliest of
the following conditions before disconnecting and attempting to redial:
- BUSY message from the modem
- NO CARRIER message from the modem
- The number of seconds specified in Wait for Carrier without other
messages from the modem
o Number of attempts
HyperACCESS automatically retries if the called number is busy or doesn't
answer. Use the spin button or edit field to specify the number of
retries (the minimum is 1).
If you have specified alternate phone numbers, HyperACCESS cycles through
each number in turn until it has dialed the number of times specified.
o Retry after
This spin button and edit field enable you to specify the time delay
between retries.
o Accept callback from remote system
This check box indicates that the system you are calling will disconnect
and call back as part of its logon security or to reverse telephone
charges. This selection places the modem in answer mode upon completion
of the current call.
When Dialing All Phonebook Entries
o Dial using
This group consists of two radio buttons that enable you to select either
Tone or Pulse dialing. Your selection depends upon the capabilities of
your telephone company or in-house PBX system. HyperACCESS uses the
selection you make for all phonebook entries.
o Retry automatically if no dial tone
Click this check box to have HyperACCESS automatically check again for a
dial tone if the first try is unsuccessful. This option is especially
useful if you share a data line. The default is off. HyperACCESS uses the
selection you make for all phonebook entries.
o Set modem speaker
Use this slider to select a setting for the volume of your modem speaker,
ranging from Off to High. HyperACCESS uses the selection you make for all
phonebook entries.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.25. Existing Connections ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This dialog is displayed when you select the Change... button in the Connect
Via group box on the Communications properties sheet. The options are as
follows:
o Existing connections
This drop-down list displays information for all current connections.
Highlight the one you want to change.
o Modify Connection...
Click this button to change the existing connection you have highlighted.
The Connection dialog is displayed.
o New Connection...
Click this button to define a new connection. The Type of New Connection
dialog is displayed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.26. External Utilities ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this dialog to change the text viewer and clipboard viewer. By default,
HyperACCESS uses the OS/2 Enhanced Editor and Clipboard.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.27. File Transfer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the File Transfer properties sheet to specify default protocols for sending
and receiving files. You can also set default directories for sending and
receiving.
The following sections define the group boxes and their corresponding edit
fields and buttons.
o Default File Transfer Protocols
This group box has drop-down lists of supported protocols for receiving
and sending. (The associated display boxes don't permit manual entry. You
must make a selection from the drop-down list.) In addition, the dialog
has Settings... push buttons for receiving and sending that display a
dialog for these protocols. If you specify the same protocol for both
sending and receiving, either Settings... button defines settings for
both directions.
The protocols currently supported are:
- 1K Xmodem
- CompuServe B+
- HyperProtocol
- Kermit
- Xmodem
- Ymodem
- Ymodem-G
- Zmodem
o Default Directories
Use this group box to define directories to use as default receiving and
sending directories.
- For receiving
Defines a default directory for files received from the remote
system. You can change the receiving directory during a session. The
drop-down list shows the last six directories used to receive files
using this phonebook entry. The Browse... push button associated
with this entry displays a directory browse dialog where you can
select a drive and directory. The file selection list isn't present.
- For sending
Defines a default directory for files transmitted to the remote
system. You can change the sending directory during a session. The
drop-down list shows the last six directories used to send files
using this phonebook entry. The Browse... push button associated
with this entry displays a directory browse dialog that permits
selection of drive and directory. The file selection list isn't
present.
o Display graphics files while receiving
With this check box selected (the default), HyperACCESS automatically
displays .GIF file images as you download them using HyperViewer. You can
disable automatic display by unselecting this check box.
Related Information
o HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix E, File Transfer Protocols
o HyperViewer online help
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.28. File Usage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the File Usage properties sheet to specify files that you want HyperACCESS
to use for various operations. HyperACCESS defines one file for each listed
function. By default, the program uses these files for all phonebook entries.
You can use this sheet to define unique files for the current phonebook entry.
The Usage list defines functions that require files. When you select an entry
in the Usage list, the Associated File edit field shows the current filename
(and relative or full path if required). The drop-down list associated with the
edit field shows the six most recently used files for this phonebook entry. You
can enter or edit the edit field, select an entry from the drop-down list, or
use the Browse... push button to select a file.
The functions defined in the Usage list are:
o Call log file
Defines the log file for the phonebook entry. It is an ASCII text file
that contains the time and date of key events that take place. You can
view this file from within HyperACCESS by selecting the Call Log panel
tab.
Note: By default all entries use DEFAULT.LOG as their log file.
o Default capture file
Defines a default capture file. You can change the capture file during a
communications session. Changing the default capture file here has the
same effect as changing it in session File/Capture to File.
o Script to run before connecting
This file is a program that is automatically run before you connect with
a remote system. For example, you can use this feature to substitute a
user-defined modem handling routine for the built-in mechanisms. These
files should have a .CMD suffix for REXX programs recorded in
HyperACCESS, .c suffix for uncompiled C code, or .EXE suffix for compiled
code written in any language (Visual Basic, REXX, Microsoft C, etc.).
o Script to run upon connecting
This file is a program that is automatically run when you connect with a
remote system. These files should have a .CMD suffix for REXX programs
recorded in HyperACCESS, .c suffix for uncompiled C code, or .EXE suffix
for compiled code written in any language (Visual Basic, REXX, Microsoft
C, etc.).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.29. Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Find enables you to search for a string of characters in the terminal area or
Backscroll Buffer. Not all fonts contain graphics characters needed for proper
terminal emulation. Using a font without graphics characters may produce
unusual results.
The search begins at the current insertion point and proceeds in the direction
specified in the dialog. You can reposition the insertion point while the Find
dialog remains active simply by clicking at the desired location.
The Find dialog edit field and options are:
o Find what
Enter the string you want to find in this edit field.
o Match whole word only
Mark this check box if your search string is a whole word. When selected,
HyperACCESS will find only occurrences of the string that are delimited
on both sides by spaces, punctua- tion, tabs, or new line characters. The
default for this option is unselected.
o Match case
Mark this check box if you want to find only exact matches with the same
upper/lower case characters. The default for this option is unselected.
o Direction
This radio button group provides choices for searching Up or Down from
the current insertion point or text selection. The default is Up.
o Find next
This push button initiates or continues a search. You can continue to
search for the next occurrence until you find what you're looking for, or
see a "Not found" message.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.30. Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Fonts properties sheet displays the current font selection and enables you
to select another font, style, and/or size. It also has a check box that
enables you to specify whether or not you want HyperACCESS to automatically
adjust font size to fit the Terminal panel size.
Note: HyperACCESS doesn't support dragging fonts from the OS/2 Fonts Palette
because the Terminal panel supports only monospace fonts.
The list boxes and check box in the dialog perform the following functions:
o Name
This drop-down combo box displays the current font selection. Make a
selection from the drop-down list. You can't enter a value in the edit
field. HyperACCESS's default font provides all standard ANSI graphics
characters.
Note: HyperACCESS lists only monospace fonts, because proportionally
spaced fonts usually aren't appropriate for communications.
o Style
This drop-down combo box displays the current selection. Make a selection
from the drop-down list. You can't enter a value in the edit field.
o Size
This drop-down combo box displays the current selection. Enter a new
value in the edit field, or make a selection from the drop-down list. If
the check box for Automatically adjust font size to terminal window size
is selected, this Size control is grayed (unavailable).
o Automatically adjust font size to terminal window size
With this check box selected (the default), HyperACCESS automatically
picks the best point size for the font and style selected and the
terminal area size. This option overrides the Size control.
o Sample
Displays a sample of the currently selected font, style, and size. If the
font includes line draw characters, a sample of them will appear in the
box. Otherwise, you'll see foreign characters.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.31. Get Password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Enter your master password for the caller list.
Once you lock a list, host mode enables you to keep others from displaying or
modifying the caller list and access privileges. You must enter the master
password whenever you click on Modify Host passwords button.
Note: If you forget this password, you must delete the password file, and
re-enter the entire caller list.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.32. HyperProtocol Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use HyperProtocol whenever the remote system also has this protocol.
(HyperProtocol is available in all versions of HyperACCESS, and on many
bulletin board systems.) HyperProtocol is the fastest, most reliable protocol,
surpassing any other type. Unlike most protocols, its speed is unaffected by
propagation delays common in long-distance calls or packet-switching networks.
HyperProtocol can send single files or file groups.
The settings are:
o Respond to HyperProtocol autostart
Select this check box (the default) to have HyperProtocol automatically
start sending or receiving when requested by the remote system. This
feature enables you to issue a command to the remote system to receive or
send without worrying about clicking a button in HyperACCESS.
o Crash Recovery
This group box has three option buttons each for receiving and sending.
In both cases, the default is Negotiate.
Note: You can use crash recovery when communicating with PCs that have a
version of HyperProtocol that also supports this feature.
The available options for Receiving are:
- Negotiate
Allows recovery when the remote system has file recovery enabled.
- Never
Prevents recovery from occurring, even if the remote system has file
recovery enabled.
- Always
File recovery will occur if the remote system has recovery set to
enable or negotiate.
The available options for Sending are:
- Negotiate
Allows recovery when the remote system has file recovery enabled.
- One time
Allows recovery during the next file transfer only, after which the
setting reverts to Negotiate. This prevents inadvertent file
recovery, which can damage files.
- Always
File recovery occurs if the remote system has recovery set to enable
or negotiate.
o Error-checking
This group box provides two radio buttons to specify the error- checking
method. CRC and Checksum are the two alternative error-checking methods
available with this protocol. Use CRC for maximum reliability, Checksum
for maximum speed. The default is CRC.
o On The Fly Compression
This group box enables you to turn data compression on or off by
selecting one of the radio buttons. On-the-fly compression is most
effective when you're transferring files that are not already compressed.
o HyperProtocol block size
Use the spin button or edit field to enter the packet size used for
transmission. The spin button increases (or decreases) packet size in
1-byte increments. The default packet size is 2048 bytes. The maximum is
32767.
o Resynchronization timeout
Use this spin button or edit field to enter a timeout used for wireless
links and other slow transfer media when you get no response errors. The
spin button increases (or decreases) the timeout in 1-second increments.
The default timeout is 5 sec- onds. The minimum is 2 and maximum is 60
seconds.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.33. IBM 3101 Terminal Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The IBM 3101 emulator supports both character mode and block mode of IBM 3101
series terminals.
The IBM 3101 Terminal Settings dialog includes the following settings:
o Turnaround Character
This group box provides four radio buttons that enable you to choose the
character used to designate ends of data blocks exchanged with the remote
system.
o Transmission Mode
This group box has two radio buttons that select whether data is
transmitted as individual characters or blocks. Select Character to send
each character as soon as it is typed. Select Block to have characters
that you type sent only when you press the Send key.
o Remote Screen Clearing
Select this check box (the default) to have the remote system clear your
screen.
o Uppercase only
When selected, this check box forces all incoming text to uppercase
letters.
o Overtype mode
When selected (the default), this check box places the Terminal panel in
overtype mode. When unselected, typed characters are inserted at the
cursor position.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.34. Import Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Clicking the Import Icon... push button on the Description properties sheet
displays this dialog.
To specify an icon (.ICO) or bitmap (.BMP) file, use the Filename edit field or
click the Browse... push button, which displays the standard file browse
dialog. Then you can select a drive, directory, and file. Then click OK to add
the selected icon, or Cancel to return to the Description properties sheet
without adding an icon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.35. Insert Response Box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Insert Response Box enables you to create your own dialogs to get
information when your program executes.
The first text box in this dialog enables you to enter the title for the
displayed dialog. The second, larger text box enables you to enter instructions
to the user.
Selecting OK generates C language statements that display the dialog with the
title and instructions you've specified and a text box. Another statement sends
typed text to the remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.36. Insert User Name/User ID/Password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Insert User Name/User ID/Password dialogs are displayed when you select the
Action menu in the Recording in Progress dialog. These dialogs ask you for the
user name, user ID, or password to send to the remote system for the recording.
This information is stored on the Runtime Values properties sheet, and you can
change it there later on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.37. Kermit Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Kermit is a widely supported error-correcting protocol that is capable of
sending file groups. While it is versatile and handles noisy connections well,
it tends to be slower than other protocols.
The settings are:
o Maximum number of bytes per packet
Use the spin buttons or edit field to set the packet size you prefer. The
actual size is the smaller of your preference and that of the remote
system. Normally this should be set to 96. Smaller settings are desirable
only with noisy lines or with networks that demand smaller packets.
o Seconds remote system must wait for each packet
Use the spin buttons or edit field to set the length of time a remote
system is told to wait for your PC to begin each packet. Normally this is
set to 5. Use a larger setting if your PC is very slow.
o Error-checking size
Use the spin button or edit field to set the error- checking you prefer.
The normal setting is 1 (1-byte checksum). Setting to 2 (2-byte checksum)
or 3 (3-byte CRC) is slower, but more resistant to line errors.
o Attempts to send each packet
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number of times your PC
retransmits packets damaged by line errors. This might be valuable for
particularly noisy telephone lines.
o Packet start character
Use the spin button or edit field to define the character that marks each
packet's beginning. The most common setting is 1 (01h). With remote
systems that require different characters, enter the decimal ASCII value
from HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix C.
o Packet end character
Use the spin button or edit field to define the character that marks each
packet's end. The most common setting is 13 (0Dh). With remote systems
that require different characters, enter the decimal ASCII value from
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix C.
o Number of pad characters
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number pad characters your
PC sends before each packet. The most common entry is 0, which uses none.
With remote systems that need pad characters, a common setting is 10,
which sends 10 characters.
o Pad character
Use the spin button or edit field to set the pad character your PC sends
before each packet. The most common entry is 0, which is the null
character. With remote systems that require different characters, enter
the decimal ASCII value from HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix C.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.38. Key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Key dialog to assign keyboard macros, HyperACCESS commands,
automatically generated or manually created REXX programs, or any .EXE program
that uses HAPI.
The edit fields and buttons in this dialog are:
o Key
Use this edit field to assign a key combination to a macro, command, or
program. Simply press the key (or combination of keys) that you want to
use. To assign Tab, Enter, Backspace, Delete, or other cursor control
keys, first press Insert, then the desired key.
o Action
This group box has three radio buttons with associated edit fields that
enable you to define what type of action you want to assign to a key
combination. You must select a radio button and enter text in an edit
field or make a selection from the associated drop-down list (or
Browse... push button) for that action type.
o Macro
This radio button and its associated edit field enable you to define a
macro (a sequence of keystrokes or key combinations). Simply press the
keys (or combination of keys) in the sequence you want them issued. To
assign Tab, Enter, Esc, Backspace, Delete, or other cursor control keys,
first press Insert, then the desired key.
o Command
This radio button enables you to make a selection from the drop-down list
of HyperACCESS commands. You can assign only one command to a key
combination. Commands in the list include all HyperACCESS menu selections
for the current panel. You can perform any operation with a single click.
o Program
This radio button, with its associated edit field, drop-down list, and
Browse... push button, enables you to specify a program filename and
path. The program file can be a REXX program or an .EXE file using HAPI.
o OK
Selecting OK without specifying an action displays a warning dialog that
enables you to exit or return to define an action. If the key combination
specified already has an action associated with it, you will see a
warning dialog that asks if you want to replace the current action.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.39. Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting Keys... from the Automation menu displays this dialog. It shows
existing user-defined key combinations that invoke a macro, command, or
program. The ability to define macros provides a powerful technique within
HyperACCESS to remap your keyboard. In addition to simple keyboard remapping,
you can use macros to assign multiple keystrokes to a single key or key
combination. This feature provides a simple, straightforward, nonprogramming
method to automate words, phrases, and key combinations you frequently use.
In addition to assigning macros, commands, or programs to key combinations, you
can assign these functions to custom or system-provided buttons. These custom
buttons will appear in the button bar along with other buttons.
The options in the Keys dialog are:
o Existing keys
This scrollable list shows existing key combinations that have macros,
commands, or programs defined. Entries in the list include the word
Macro, Program, or Command to indicate what type of action the key
combination represents. To modify or delete an entry, select it and click
the appropriate button.
o Modify...
Use this push button to modify an existing macro, program, command, or
key combination assignment.
o New...
Use this push button to define a new macro, program, or command for a key
combination.
o Delete
Use this push button to delete an existing key combination assignment.
After selecting an entry in the list, clicking this button displays a
warning dialog that enables you to confirm your selection.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.40. Localization ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Localization dialog contains controls that you can use to configure a
terminal emulator for use with the language of your country or the country
you're calling. A version of HyperACCESS containing additional terminal
emulators with more localization controls may be available for your country or
language.
At this time, all emulators in the US version of HyperACCESS have one
Localization control:
o Code page
The code page determines the characters displayed by HyperACCESS on your
monitor. Use the drop-down list to select the correct code page for your
language. The default is the US code page. For other national languages,
see your OS/2 User's Manual. If you're communicating with systems using
other languages, you'll need to change this parameter.
Note: Many characters are the same from one code page to another. Other
characters, such as line draw and accented characters, may differ
significantly.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.41. Lock List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Lock List dialog enables you to enter a master password that prevents
others from viewing or changing your password file.
Once you lock a list, host mode enables you to keep others from displaying or
modifying the caller list and access privileges. After you've specified a
master password, you'll be required to enter it whenever you click the Modify
Host passwords button.
Note: If you forget this password, you must delete the password file, and
re-enter the entire caller list.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.42. Log File In Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You have made changes to the active log file, but the same log file is being
used by another process, or another instance of HyperACCESS. You can select
Save Manual Edits, but your edits might be lost. You can select Discard Manual
Edits, and make the changes again later, later, when the log file is not in use
by another process. Or you can select Save As... and save this changed log file
with a new name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.43. Message Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Message Pad is a special text editor that you can use to type responses to
the remote system. It enables you to manipulate text with the mouse, keyboard,
or Edit menu. You can use Message Pad for creating and sending text messages.
For example, you can read an incoming e-mail message using the terminal screen
and Backscroll Buffer, and then create an answer using the text editing and
manipulation capabilities of the Message Pad.
You can also use Message Pad in chat mode to carry on an interactive dialog
with a user on the remote system. Simply select Chat mode from the Message Pad
Options menu. Chat mode enables you to send text to the remote system each time
you press Enter.
With Message Pad you'll save time because you won't have to use an e-mail
editor; or switch from your communications session, use your own editor to
create your message, save the message, switch back to the session, and send
your message. You can use the Send! menu selection to send selected text or the
entire contents of the Message Pad window to the remote system.
You open the Message Pad window either by clicking on the Terminal panel's
Message Pad button or selecting View/Message Pad.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.44. Modify Caller ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To change a caller's user name, password, or privileges from the Host panel,
select a caller in the Passwords dialog and click the Modify... push button.
The information you can modify includes the following:
o First name
The caller's first name. Control characters and blanks aren't permitted,
and upper and lowercase characters are equivalent.
o Last name
The caller's last name. Control characters and blanks aren't permitted,
and upper and lowercase characters are equivalent.
o Password
The caller's password. Control characters and blanks aren't permitted,
and upper and lowercase characters are equivalent.
o Callback number
Use this check box with its associated edit field to enter a telephone
number that HyperACCESS will call after this user successfully logs on.
Upon successful logon, host mode hangs up, waits a moment, and then calls
this telephone number one time. You can use this capability to provide an
additional level of security, or to reverse telephone charges. Once
reconnected, the caller can use the privileges you've assigned.
o Privileges
Use this group box to specify access privileges for this caller. Select
the check boxes for the privileges you want to grant.
Note: You can change default values for these settings by selecting
Default Privileges... in the Passwords dialog.
- Download files from Host (Type, Send, Hsend, etc.)
Select this check box to let callers enter commands to send files
from your computer to their computer. It's the caller's
responsibility to issue the correct command depending on the
protocol.
- Upload files to Host (Rec, Hrec, Zrec, etc.)
Select this check box to let callers enter commands to send files
from their computer to your computer. It's the caller's
responsibility to issue the correct command depending on the
protocol.
- File management (Copy, Del, etc.)
Select this check box to let the caller use COPY, DELETE, RENAME,
MKDIR, and RMDIR. To prevent tampering with your files and
directories, leave this check box unselected.
- Limit access to
Select this check box to limit the caller's access to a particular
drive or directory. Enter the drive and directory path in the
associated edit field, or use the Browse... push button to help you
locate the path.
This becomes the caller's default location, and commands issued
affect only this drive and directory.
Note: The caller also has access to all subdirectories of the
specified drive and directory.
o Next
Select this push button to display the next caller in the list without
returning to the Passwords dialog.
o Previous
Select this push button to display the previous caller in the list
without returning to the Passwords dialog.
Note: If you select Next or Previous after you've made changes to the
current caller entry, host mode pops up a dialog requesting that you
confirm those changes.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.45. Name Modem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You selected the Not Listed button on the Connection dialog because you didn't
find the name of your modem in the modem list. Now, with the Name Modem dialog
displayed, you can enter the official name of your modem or make up a name. The
name you enter is added to the HyperACCESS list of modems.
Note: Modems defined using the Not Listed... button are stored in the file
USERMDM.TXT. You can change the name, setup strings, and settings for these
modems by editing that file directly. The beginning of the file lists
guidelines for the proper format of modem entries within the file.
This feature provides additional flexibility in managing user-defined modems
beyond what can be achieved directly through the HyperACCESS user interface.
For example, you can provide a USERMDM.TXT file to other HyperACCESS users so
they can use modems you have defined. The file also enables you to specify
additional settings beyond those available in the user interface, such as the
message your modem displays when it establishes a connection.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.46. New Password List ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The New Password List asks you to define a new password file for host mode. By
default, HyperACCESS suggests a name with a PWD extension, and stores the file
in the user data directory.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.47. No Template Found ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A template is required for a list file so that HyperACCESS can properly extract
the names, phone numbers, and other information. If you select Copy..., you
will then specify a template from another file to be used for this file. If you
select New..., the Template dialog will be displayed, so you can select
settings for the template.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.48. No Write Access ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS cannot write information to the log file for this connection,
because the log file is being used by another connection or by another instance
of HyperACCESS. You can continue to display this message while you close the
other connection. Then select Retry. Or you can select Discard to close this
connection without writing information to the log file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.49. Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Options dialog in host mode enables you to configure how host mode
operates. The options and parameters specified in this dialog are:
o Accept only one call
Select this check box when you want host mode to terminate after the
first completed call-in session.
o Answer after
Use the edit field or its associated spin button to enter the number of
rings you want to wait until host mode answers the phone call (the
default is 1). If you're sharing the phone line with voice calls or other
machines, such as a fax, you might want to change the default setting.
o Time-out after
Use this edit field and its associated spin button to set the number of
seconds you want to let a caller remain connected without activity. This
setting prevents callers from inadvertently remaining connected
indefinitely. If you want host mode to maintain connections indefinitely,
set this number to zero.
o Welcome file
Use this edit field, or its associated Browse... push button, to enter
the path and filename of the file that contains your greeting to callers
of your system.
HyperACCESS host mode includes a file called WELCOME.TXT. You can edit
this file using OS/2 Enhanced Editor or any text editor. Alternatively,
you can specify a different file in the host mode Options dialog. To
ensure compatibility with potential callers, it's a good idea to limit
text lines to less than 80 characters. If you're uncertain as to the type
of terminal or emulator the caller may be using, it's also good practice
to limit your welcoming text to standard ASCII characters. Extended
ASCII, or graphics characters, can create problems for some terminals. If
all callers will be using an ANSI terminal emulator, you may include
extended ASCII characters in your welcome message to add special graphics
and colors.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.50. Passwords ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Passwords dialog for host mode enables you to specify a password file, lock
the file, and display caller names. The push buttons enable you to add and
modify users and their privileges.
When you click the Modify Host passwords button in the button bar of the Host
panel, HyperACCESS host mode displays the Passwords dialog. Before you can
define passwords, you must specify a password file. Do one of the following
actions:
o Enter or edit a filename and path in the Password list edit field or use
the drop-down list to select a previously used password file.
o Use the Browse... button to select a previously defined password file. By
default, password files have a PWD extension.
o Click the New... button to define a new password file. By default,
HyperACCESS suggests a name with a PWD extension, and stores the file in
the user data directory.
The Passwords dialog has the following information, parameters, and buttons:
Grant Access To
This group box has three radio buttons that enable you to specify how host
mode treats callers attempting to log on. The options are:
- Only callers whose names and passwords are already in list
When you select this radio button, host mode won't let callers log
on to your system unless their name and password appear in the
password file.
- All callers, but let new callers add their names and passwords to
the list
When you select this radio button, callers can identify themselves
and their passwords during their first call. Such callers receive
privileges defined in the Default Privileges dialog.
- All callers - without asking for names and passwords
When you select this radio button, host mode doesn't ask for names
and passwords when users log on.
o Password list
This edit field displays the current path and filename of the password
file. You can enter a new path and/or filename or use the Browse... push
button to select a file. The New... button enables you to define a new
password file.
o Add...
Clicking this push button displays the Add Callers dialog, where you can
add new callers and specify their access privileges.
o Modify...
Clicking this push button, after you select an entry from the password
list, displays the Modify Callers dialog and enables you to modify
existing callers and their access privileges.
o Delete...
Clicking this push button, after you select an entry from the password
list, displays a warning dialog that requests confirmation before
deleting the selected caller from the list.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.51. Paste from File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Paste from File dialog is displayed when you select Edit/Paste from a
Terminal panel menu. Use it to paste a file to the host system.
The edit field, options, and buttons are:
o File
This drop-down combo box has a history list that displays up to six files
previously used for paste operations. Enter a filename in the edit field
or select a file from the drop-down list.
o Browse...
Use this push button to specify a file for the paste operation.
o OK
Use this push button to copy the contents of a file to the host system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.52. Phone Number Prefix and Suffix ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Phone Number Prefix and Suffix dialog is displayed when you click the
Change... button in the Phone Number Prefix/Suffix group box on the
Communications properties sheet. Use it to specify up to 8 prefixes and 8
suffixes for phone numbers of remote systems.
The group boxes are in this dialog are:
o Prefix
Select one of the two radio buttons, None or Use stored prefix. To
create a prefix, select an empty entry in the scrollable list and type
the value in the edit field. To edit an entry, select it and modify it in
the edit field. To use a stored prefix, select the prefix in the list,
and select the Use stored prefix radio button. If you select this radio
button when there is no entry in the edit field, HyperACCESS selects None
when you close the dialog. Clicking OK saves any additions or
modifications you made to the prefix or suffix lists. These lists apply
to all phonebook entries.
Common prefixes select an outside line on PBX telephone systems (for
example, 9), disable call waiting (for example, *70 in many areas), or
dial a special access code for your long distance carrier. Type a comma
(,) after the prefix to enter a 2-second pause before dialing the phone
number. You can enter as many commas as necessary to get the pause length
you need.
o Suffix
Select one of the two radio buttons, None or Use stored suffix. To create
a suffix, select an empty entry in the scrollable list and type the value
in the edit field. To edit an entry, select it and modify it in the edit
field. To use a stored suffix, select the suffix in the list, and select
the Use stored suffix radio button. If you select the radio button when
there is no entry in the edit field, HyperACCESS selects None when you
close the dialog. Clicking OK saves any additions or modifications you
made to the prefix or suffix list. These lists apply to all phonebook
entries.
Common suffixes include credit card numbers or accounting codes. Type a
comma (,) at the beginning of the suffix to enter a 2-second pause before
dialing the suffix. You can enter as many commas as necessary to get the
pause length you need.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.53. Phonebook Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Enter a name for the phonebook. The maximum number of characters is 32. The
name should be long enough to clearly identify the system, but not so long that
it requires a wide tab.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.54. Preferences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Preferences properties sheet to specify how HyperACCESS reacts to your
mouse clicks, and how it handles the Backscroll Buffer.
The following sections define the group boxes and their radio buttons and the
edit fields that appear on this sheet.
o Button 1 Double-click
This group box has three radio buttons that determine the action taken
when you double-click the mouse selection button (normally the left
button). The options are:
- Selects word
Any other selected text is deselected and the word currently under
the mouse pointer is selected and highlighted. This action can occur
in the terminal viewing area, or Backscroll Buffer.
This is the default action, and is consistent with normal OS/2
interface standards. Extended selection can proceed from the
selected word by dragging the mouse pointer (without releasing on
the second click), or using extended selection keys (Shift+left
arrow, Shift+right arrow, Ctrl+Shift+left arrow, Ctrl+Shift+right
arrow).
- Copies word or selected text to host
Automatically transmits the word under the mouse pointer; or if the
mouse pointer is pointing to selected text, transmits the selected
text to the remote system. If the mouse pointer is over white space,
nothing is transmitted.
- Copies word or selected text to host with Enter
Behaves just like the previous option; plus transmits a carriage
return character after any text. If the mouse pointer is over white
space, HyperACCESS transmits a single carriage return character.
o Button 2 Click
This group box has four radio buttons that determine the action taken
when you click the second mouse button (by default, the right button of a
two- or three-button mouse).
The options are:
- Displays pop-up menu
Displays pop-up menus within the terminal viewing area or Backscroll
Buffer. This is the default.
- Positions host cursor
Repositions the remote system's cursor position, provided the
terminal being emulated has the capability to transmit cursor
control characters. For those terminals, HyperACCESS typically
transmits multiple cursor control characters equivalent to the
number of times arrow keys would have been pressed to arrive at the
new position.
Because few remote systems respond properly to this feature,
HyperACCESS makes no attempt to verify appropriate response.
However, an error message displays when cursor repositioning is used
with terminal emulators that don't support cursor control
characters.
- Copies single letter to host
Automatically transmits the single character under the mouse
pointer. Clicking on white space sends an Enter character to the
remote system.
- Does nothing
Disables HyperACCESS response to mouse button 2.
o Backscroll maximum size
This spin button determines the size of the Backscroll Buffer. The
default is 5000 lines. Any number between 0 and 5000 is valid. Manually
entered numbers larger than 5000 are automatically set to 5000.
o Portion of maximum size nonvolatile
This spin button determines the percentage of the Backscroll Buffer saved
between uses of this phonebook entry. The default is 100%. Any integer
between 0 and 100% is valid. If less than 100%, HyperACCESS removes the
oldest information in the Backscroll Buffer before saving to the file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.55. Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Print dialog to print selected text in the terminal area or Backscroll
Buffer. If you haven't selected text, HyperACCESS prints the entire terminal
area or Backscroll Buffer, whichever is currently active.
The information displayed in this dialog, and its parameters and options, are:
o Printer
Displays the current printer. This printer is either the system default
printer or the printer you selected using the Print Setup dialog.
o Copies
The number of copies to print.
o Print Range
This group box has two radio buttons:
- All
Prints the entire contents of the currently active area. If there is
no selected text, this is the only option available.
- Selected Text
Prints selected text. This option is available only if you've
selected text.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.56. Receive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Receive is a modeless dialog that you can position anywhere on your screen. Use
this dialog to set the file transfer protocol and other parameters for
receiving files from a remote system. You can continue to interact with the
remote system with this dialog displayed. You can prepare to receive files,
issue commands to the remote system, then click the Receive button.
Some option check boxes may be unavailable (grayed out or dimmed) for the
selected file transfer protocol. The options and parameters specified in this
dialog are:
o Filename or directory to receive into
This edit field with its associated drop-down list and Browse... push
button enables you to specify either a filename or a path for receiving
files.
If you've already received a file in the current session, the file path
and name appear in the edit field. The drop-down history list shows the
paths and filenames of the most recently received files. The Browse...
push button displays the standard file browse dialog, from which you can
select a drive, directory, and file.
o Transfer protocol
This drop-down list displays the default transfer protocol for this
phonebook entry. You can select another protocol from the drop-down list
(you can't type into the box associated with the drop-down list).
In addition, the dialog has a Settings... push button that displays a
custom dialog for each protocol. Appendix E of the user's guide describes
each protocol and lists its options and defaults.
o Use received filenames
This check box is available if the selected protocol is capable of
sending filename information. Otherwise it is dimmed or grayed out
(unavailable). Selecting this option instructs HyperACCESS to use
filenames sent as part of the file transfer.
o Use received file time/date
This check box is available if the selected protocol is capable of
sending a file's time and date attributes. If this check box is selected,
HyperACCESS uses the received file's time and date when saving the file.
If not selected, HyperACCESS uses the current time and date for the file.
o Use received directories
This check box is available if the selected protocol is capable of
sending directory path information. Otherwise, it is dimmed or grayed out
(unavailable). Selecting this option instructs HyperACCESS to use the
path sent as part of the file transfer.
o If File Already Exists
This group box provides six radio buttons that determine how HyperACCESS
handles received files that have the same name as files that already
exist. The options are:
- Overwrite
Deletes existing files and replaces them with incoming data.
- Append
Adds incoming data to existing files.
- Refuse
The file transfer will be refused if the file already exists.
- Refuse unless newer
The date and time of the incoming file will be checked to see if
it's newer, and if it is, it will overwrite the existing file;
otherwise, the file transfer will be refused.
- Rename using date
The filename will be modified to incorporate a date with the format
MMDD999, where MM is the month (values 01 to 12), DD is the day
(values 01 to 31), and 999 is a sequence number for files received
on this date (values 000 to 999). The first character and extension
of the filename remain unchanged.
- Rename sequentially
A sequential number, starting with zero, is appended to the
filename. If the name is already at its maximum length (254 or 8),
the sequence number replaces characters at the end of the name
o Save partial file if transmission interrupted
This check box indicates that HyperACCESS is to save partly completed
file transfers. (It permits you to use Zmodem's and HyperProtocol's crash
recovery procedures.) If this box is left unchecked, HyperACCESS deletes
partly transferred files.
o Display graphics files while receiving
With this check box selected (the default), HyperACCESS automatically
displays .GIF file images as you download them using HyperViewer. You can
disable automatic display by unselecting this check box.
o Receive
This push button initiates the receive sequence for the selected protocol
and displays the receive progress dialog. Be sure to issue commands to
the remote system instructing it to begin sending before you click
Receive.
Related Information
HyperViewer online help
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.57. Receive File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Xmodem protocol can transfer only one file at a time. It does not transfer
filenames.
Enter a filename for the file you are going to receive using the Xmodem
protocol.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.58. Receive Progress ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Receive Progress dialog has a window title that includes both the phonebook
entry name and protocol. The default dialog has summary information about the
progress of the file transfer, which includes information that depends on the
protocol in use. Typically this information includes a progress bar, the number
of retries, and the name of the current file. Additional information may
include estimated time remaining for the transfer, packet size, total retries,
elapsed time, and throughput. This dialog has Expand and Cancel buttons, and
may include a Skip file button. The Expand button displays a dialog with more
extensive status information.
To automatically hang up when the transfer is complete, select the Disconnect
after transfer check box.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.59. Recording Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting Recording Options... from the Template Automation menu displays the
Recording Options dialog. In the Abort During Playback group box there are two
radio buttons:
o Only if user aborts manually
Select this radio button to create a generated program that ends the
recording of the session only when you manually intervene. This option is
the default.
o If remote system fails to respond within x seconds
Select this radio button to create program statements that generate a
timeout after the specified number of seconds, and ends the generated
program if the remote system hasn't responded. You specify the number of
seconds for the timeout using the spin button or associated edit field.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.60. Redisplay File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Terminal Panel File/Redisplay File... menu choice displays a standard file
Open dialog that enables you to select a file for display. If the file is one
that HyperViewer supports, HyperACCESS launches HyperViewer and displays the
file in the HyperViewer window. Otherwise, HyperACCESS displays the file in the
Terminal panel. In this case, data in the file replaces the current Terminal
panel contents. If you are online, HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog before
displaying the file in the Terminal panel. Data displayed in this manner
appears only on your screen and isn't transmitted to the remote system.
Note: Since you can display any file, HyperACCESS has no way of knowing whether
data will display properly with the current emulator. Displaying garbage
characters may produce strange looking results, but it is harmless.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 5, HyperACCESS Reference, "HyperViewer
Window"
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.61. Runtime Values ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use Runtime Values dialog to specify variable data that your automation
programs (scripts) can use. You can set or review the Runtime Values from the
Automation menu or Properties notebook.
You can enter values for User Name, User ID, Password, and String #0 through
String #20. To make use of these values, an automation program must include
statements that retrieve the values. While recording programs, you can insert
User Name, User ID, or Password statements by using the Action menu in the
Recording in Progress window. You can also include such statements when writing
automation programs, plus use statements that retrieve and use String #0
through String #20.
If you want to obscure the Password entry for security purposes, click the Hide
button. The button label changes to Show..., and the password appears as
asterisks. You can change the password, even while it is hidden; the new
password also appears as asterisks. To "unhide" the password, click the Show...
button, and enter the present password, to prove you are authorized to make it
visible.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.62. Select Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use Select Printer to change the printer selection for HyperACCESS.
The Available Printers box lists all installed printers. Select a printer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.63. Send ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Send is a modeless dialog that you can position anywhere on your screen. Use
this dialog to set the file transfer protocol and other parameters for sending
files to a remote system. You can continue to interact with the remote system
with this dialog displayed. You can prepare to send files, issue commands to
the remote system, then click the Send button.
The options and parameters specified, and information displayed in this dialog,
are:
o Directory
This area of the dialog displays the current full path to which file
selection applies. The path changes when you select a file in the file
browse dialog.
o Filename
This drop-down combo field and Browse.. push button enable you to specify
a filename you want to send. (You can enter full or relative paths with
or without wildcard filename selection.)
If you've already sent and/or selected files or paths in the current
session, those names appear in the drop-down history list, and the most
recently selected file or path appears in the edit field. The Browse...
push button displays the standard file browse dialog, from which you can
select a drive, directory, and file.
o Transfer protocol
This drop-down list displays the default transfer protocol for this
session. You can select another protocol from the drop- down list (you
can't type into the display box associated with the drop-down list). For
more information on transfer protocols, see the HyperACCESS User's
Manual, Appendix E, File Transfer Protocols.
In addition, the dialog has a Settings... push button that displays a
custom dialog for each protocol. The HyperACCESS user's manual, Appendix
E, File Transfer Protocols, describes each protocol and lists its options
and defaults.
o Include matching files from subdirectories
When selected, this option causes HyperACCESS to search subdirectories of
the path specified in the Filename edit field. Files matching the
filename or wildcard selection are sent.
o Include path when sending files
This check box, when selected, causes HyperACCESS to send the full path
along with the filename. This option is available only when it's
supported by the selected protocol.
o Send
This push button initiates the transmission sequence for the selected
protocol and displays the Send Progress dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.64. Send Progress ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Send Progress dialog has a window title that includes both the
phonebookentry name and protocol. The default dialog has summary information
about the progress of the file transfer, which includes the name of the current
file, a progress bar, the number of retries, the estimated time remaining or
elapsed time for the transfer, and throughput. This dialog has Expand and
Cancel buttons, and may include a Skip file button.
The Expand button displays a dialog with more extensive status information.
To hang up automatically when the transfer is complete, check the Disconnect
after transfer check box.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.65. Show Password ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Show Password dialog appears when you click the Show... button. This button
appears on the Runtime Values properties sheet. It also appears on the dialog
that is displayed when you select Automation Runtime Values from the Terminal
panel menu bar.
Enter your current password to have it displayed in the Password field. The
Show button becomes the Hide button so you can have asterisks displayed in the
Password field instead of your password.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.66. Sound ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the radio buttons in this dialog to select multimedia sound, system beeps,
or silent operation. The buttons are:
o Multimedia sound
This button is the default if your system has multimedia extensions
(MMPM/2) installed. Otherwise, it is grayed out (unavailable). If
selected, this button enables you to associate .WAV files with
HyperACCESS events.
o System beeps
This button is the default if your system doesn't have multimedia
extensions installed. If selected, this button causes HyperACCESS to beep
the system speaker whenever one of the listed events occurs.
o Silent
This button disables sound for all events.
If you select Multimedia sound, you associate a file with each event by
following these steps:
1. Select an event from the Event list (for example, Disconnection).
2. Use the Associated File combo field to enter a filename, select a
filename from the drop-down history list, or use the Browse... push
button to select a .WAV file for the event.
3. Use the Test button to listen to the .WAV file.
4. Click OK when you have completed all associations.
To disable multimedia sound for an event, make sure its Associated File edit
field is blank.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.67. Stop Recording ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Stop Recording dialog is displayed after you select Stop! on the menu bar
of the Recording in Progress window.
HyperACCESS records your logon to a remote system when you do one of the
following:
o Click the Record button.
o Select Connect and record logon from a menu
o Select Automation Record from the Terminal panel menu bar.
Regardless of which technique you choose to record a new logon sequence,
HyperACCESS dials the remote system and learns its messages and your
responses. When you've completed the logon sequence, and select Stop!,
HyperACCESS displays the Stop Recording dialog with the Install as current
logon task check box selected.
Enter a filename by typing in the edit field, making a selection from the
history drop-down list, or making a selection using Browse.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 6, Automation Tools
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.68. Telephone Number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
There is no telephone number specified for the remote system you are calling.
Enter the telephone number in the text box.
To save this telephone number, click the check box Store with the current
session.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.69. Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Template dialog to define a template for the current list file.
HyperACCESS requires a template for every list file so that it can interpret
the data in the file.
After you have entered the settings in this dialog, confirm that they are
correct by placing a trial call or copying a list file entry to a phonebook.
The edit fields and buttons in this dialog are:
o Name
The name of the list file with which this template is associated.
o Fields separated by
This drop-down list enables you to pick a character (or technique) to
separate data items in each entry. Choices in this list are:
- Comma
- Tab
- Quote
- Column spacing
Select Column spacing for list files in which each data field always
begins a specific number of characters from the left end of the
line. The left-most character in each line is column 1. List files
that use column spacing will probably look odd unless the listbox
uses a monospace font.
o Name field location
Use this edit field to specify which field number in each entry
represents the phonebook entry name.
o Phone number field location
Use this edit field to select which field number in each entry represents
the phone number for data calls. With list files that give no phone
number for data calls, leave this entry blank.
o Data begins in line number
Use this edit field to define the number of lines at the beginning of the
file that don't include phonebook entries. Such lines may include
copyright information and file attribution. This field causes HyperACCESS
to display a warning if you attempt to dial or copy lines that are within
this region of the file.
o Lines containing comments begin with
Use this edit field to specify a character that defines a comment line in
the list file. Entering a character in this field causes HyperACCESS to
display a warning if you attempt to dial or copy lines that begin with
the specified character.
o Add prefix to dial
Use this edit field to specify a prefix for HyperACCESS to use when
dialing a phone number in the list. The prefix you enter here will not be
stored permanantly for use in other parts of the program. However if you
enter a prefix, 9, for example, that has been previously specified in the
Add Number Prefix and Suffix dialog, that stored prefix will be selected
as the prefix to use. If you enter a prefix that has not been previously
specified then the prefix you enter will be appended to the phone number
itself.
Note: For list files that use column spacing, specify the starting column
number of the fields.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.70. Terminal Emulator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Terminal Emulator properties sheet to select the type of terminal that
you want HyperACCESS to emulate. You can also define settings that are
applicable to any emulation.
The Settings... button displays a dialog that is unique for each terminal
emulator. (See HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator
Characteristics, for more information on emulator-specific settings.)
The edit fields and buttons in this dialog are:
o Terminal
This drop-down list box displays the terminal emulations supported by
HyperACCESS. Among the terminal types currently supported are:
- ANSI
- CompuServe
- IBM 3101
- TTY
- VT100
- VT220
- VT320
o Function, Arrow, and Control Keys Act as
This group box has two radio buttons that enable you to specify whether
the function, arrow, and control keys should perform as Terminal keys or
as System keys.
o Backspace Key Sends
This group box has three radio buttons that enable you to specify what
HyperACCESS sends the remote system each time you press the Backspace
key. Your choices are:
- Ctrl+H
Send the value associated with C+H. It is ASCII backspace (08H).
- Del
Send the value associated with Del (7FH).
- Ctrl+H, Space, Ctrl+H
Send an ASCII backspace, replace the character at that position with
a space character, and backspace again. This option provides a
destructive backspace for systems that provide only a nondestructive
backspace.
o Cursor
This group box has two radio buttons that enable you to select either an
Underline or a Block cursor. It also has a check box that you can select
to have the cursor blink. If the box is not checked, the curser does not
blink.
o Number of Rows and Columns
These two spin buttons and their associated edit fields enable you to
specify the terminal screen height (Rows) and width (Columns). You can
specify a minimum of 2 and a maximum of 64 rows, and a minimum of 2 and a
maximum of 132 columns. The Default push button returns the number of
rows and columns to appropriate settings for the selected terminal.
Note: Selecting a number of Rows or Columns different from the default values
might cause text on the terminal screen to appear misaligned with remote
systems that lack support for this capability.
Use the Localization... button to select the font code page to be used by the
terminal emulator.
For the details of the localization parameters available for an emulator, see
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.71. TTY Terminal Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the TTY (Teletype) emulator with any system that calls for a TTY terminal,
a Teletype, a glass terminal, or no terminal. This class of terminal, with its
simplicity and wide availability, has become a de facto standard in
communications, and you can access more systems with this emulator than any
other. Even systems designed for use with more sophisticated terminals often
provide rudimentary support for TTY terminals as well. TTY terminals use only
regular, alphanumeric keys.
There are no emulator-unique settings for TTY emulation.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.72. Type of New Connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This dialog is displayed when you select New Connection... from the Existing
Connections dialog. In this dialog, you specify what type your new connection
will be. Any of these connection types can coexist with other connections or
connection types, depending upon your hardware.
In the Type of connection drop-down list, select Direct Cable, Modem or Modem
Pool, or TCP/IP for your new connection. If you select either Direct Cable or
Modem or Modem Pool, a Connection dialog is displayed so you can select
settings. If you select TCP/IP, the Connect Through dialog is displayed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.73. VT52 Terminal Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The DEC emulators (VT52, VT100, VT220, and VT320) support virtually all
features of VT52, VT100, VT220, and VT320 terminals. Each emulator fully
supports cursor-control (both ANSI and VT52), cursor-memory, cursor-reporting,
tab stops, scrolling regions, half and full-duplex operation, origin mode, and
host-controlled printer operations.
The settings in this dialog are:
o PF1-PF4 mapped to top row of keypad
When selected, this check box maps PF1 - PF4 keys to NumLock, /, *, and -
on the keypad in addition to F1 - F4.
o Keypad application mode
When selected, this check box specifies that the keypad sends application
codes that control programs running on the host.
o Cursor keypad mode
When this check box is selected, cursor keys (arrow keys) send Normal
codes, which move the cursor. When this check box is not selected, the
cursor keys send application codes, which control remote applications.
o Restore Default Tab Settings
Clicking this push button replaces tab settings the host has sent with
tab settings from the ASCII Receiving and ASCII Sending properties
sheets.
o Cursor
This group box has two radio buttons that select between an Underline and
Block cursor. It also has a check box that enables you to select a
blinking (selected) or nonblinking (unselected) cursor.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.74. VT100 Terminal Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The DEC emulators (VT52, VT100, VT220, and VT320) support virtually all
features of VT100, VT220, and VT320 terminals. Each emulator fully supports
cursor-control (both ANSI and VT52), cursor-memory, cursor-reporting, tab
stops, scrolling regions, half and full-duplex operation, origin mode, and
host-controlled printer operations.
The settings in this dialog are:
o PF1-PF4 mapped to top row of keypad
When selected, this check box maps PF1 - PF4 keys to NumLock, /, *, and -
on the keypad in addition to F1 - F4.
o Keypad application mode
When selected, this check box specifies that the keypad sends application
codes that control programs running on the host.
o Cursor keypad mode
When this check box is selected, cursor keys (arrow keys) send Normal
codes, which move the cursor. When this check box is not selected, the
cursor keys send application codes, which control remote applications.
o Restore Default Tab Settings
Clicking this push button replaces tab settings the host has sent with
tab settings from the ASCII Receiving and ASCII Sending properties
sheets.
o Character set
This drop-down list enables you to specify the character set to be used:
ASCII, special graphics (such as line draw characters), or a country.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.75. VT220 and VT320 Terminal Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The DEC emulators (VT100, VT220, and VT320) support virtually all features of
VT100, VT220, and VT320 terminals. Each emulator fully supports cursor-control
(both ANSI and VT52), cursor-memory, cursor-reporting, tab stops, scrolling
regions, half and full-duplex operation, origin mode, and host-controlled
printer operations.
The VT220 and VT320 emulators support multinational, British, French, French
Canadian, German, and ASCII character sets. Double-high characters display as
two lines of identical characters.
The settings in the VT220 and VT320 Terminal Settings dialog are:
o PF1-PF4 mapped to top row of keypad
When selected, this check box maps PF1 - PF4 keys to NUMLOCK, /, *, and -
on the keypad in addition to F1 - F4.
o Keypad application mode
When selected, this check box specifies that the keypad sends application
codes that control programs running on the host.
o Cursor keypad mode
When this check box is selected, cursor keys (arrow keys) send Normal
codes, which move the cursor. When this check box is not selected, the
cursor keys send application codes, which control remote applications.
o 8 bit control codes
When this check box is selected, your PC sends 8-bit control sequences.
When this check box is not selected, your PC sends the earlier 7-bit
sequences.
o User-defined keys allowed
When this check box is selected, user-defined outputs are sent to your
terminal by the host for Shift-F6 thru Shift-F20.
o Restore Default Tab Settings
Clicking this push button replaces tab settings the host has sent with
tab settings from the ASCII Receiving and ASCII Sending properties
sheets.
o Character set
This drop-down list enables you to specify the national character set to
be used. For VT220 and VT320 terminal emulator to produce correct
characters, you need to leave the code page in the Localization dialog
set to 437.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.76. Xmodem Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Xmodem is a relatively simple, 128-byte packet, error-correcting protocol,
which transfers only one file at a time without a filename. Xmodem is generally
faster than Ymodem if the line is noisy, but slower if it is clean, as it
transmits 128-byte packets rather than 1024 bytes as with Ymodem.
The settings are:
o Error-checking
This group box provides three radio buttons to specify the error-checking
method. The default is Auto, which adapts automatically to the
error-checking method of the remote system. CRC and Checksum are the two
alternative error-checking methods available with this protocol. Certain
systems require that you set this parameter to Checksum.
o Seconds to wait to receive each packet
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number of seconds your PC
waits for each packet to begin. This is normally set to 10. With slower
systems such as CompuServe, you might need to set this as high as 30.
o Seconds to wait to receive each byte
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number of seconds your PC
waits for each byte in the packet. This is normally set to 5. With slower
systems such as CompuServe, you might need to set this as high as 10.
o Attempts to send each packet
Use the spin button or edit field to set how many times your PC
retransmits (or requests retransmission of) each packet. Normally this is
4.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.77. Ymodem Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Ymodem (also known as Ymodem Batch) is a 1024-byte packet, error-correcting
protocol capable of transferring single files or groups. Ymodem is generally
faster than Xmodem over noise-free lines, but slower over noisy lines, as it
must retransmit 1024-byte packets rather than 128 bytes as with Xmodem. (Ymodem
is similar to 1K Xmodem, except that 1K Xmodem transfers only one file at a
time without a filename.)
The settings are:
o Seconds to wait to receive each packet
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number of seconds your PC
waits for each packet to begin. This is normally set to 10. With slower
systems such as CompuServe, you might need to set this as high as 30.
o Seconds to wait to receive each byte
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number of seconds your PC
waits for each byte in the packet. This is normally set to 5. With slower
systems such as CompuServe, you might need to set this as high as 10.
o Attempts to send each packet
Use the spin button or edit field to set how many times your PC
retransmits (or requests retransmission of) each packet. Normally this is
4. You might want to increase this value for particularly noisy telephone
lines.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.78. Ymodem G Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Ymodem G is a variant of Ymodem that does away with packet-by-packet
acknowledgments and simply aborts the transfer if an error is detected. Ymodem
G should be used only with error-correcting modems or inherently error-free
connections. Ymodem G is clearly faster than Ymodem, Xmodem, and Kermit, but
there is a common misconception that Ymodem G is the best protocol to use with
error-correcting modems. In reality, HyperProtocol and Zmodem are much better
because they can correct errors the modems cannot sense (such as those
introduced by the computers or serial ports) with no penalty in performance.
The settings are:
o Seconds to wait to receive each packet
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number of seconds your PC
waits for each packet to begin. This is normally set to 10. With slower
systems such as CompuServe, you might need to set this as high as 30.
o Seconds to wait to receive each byte
Use the spin button or edit field to set the number of seconds your PC
waits for each byte in the packet. This is normally set to 5. With slower
systems such as CompuServe, you might need to set this as high as 10.
o Attempts to send each packet
Use the spin button or edit field to set how many times your PC
retransmits (or requests retransmission of) each packet. Normally this is
4. You might want to increase this value for particularly noisy telephone
lines.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.79. Zmodem Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Zmodem is an error-correcting, streaming protocol that has become popular on
bulletin boards. Next to HyperProtocol, it is the fastest, most desirable
protocol. Like HyperProtocol, it maintains its speed despite propagation
delays, though its efficiency is slightly less (98% versus 99%), and it lacks
compression. Zmodem can send single files or file groups.
The settings are: The Zmodem Settings dialog has three group boxes: Receiving,
Sending, and Transmission.
o Receiving
- Respond to modem autostart
Select this check box to have HyperACCESS automatically begin
receiving as soon as you command the remote system to send. If this
check box is left unselected, you must click the Receive push button
in the Receive dialog to begin receiving. The default is selected.
- If the file already exists
This group consists of two radio buttons. Select one.
o Follow sender's Append/Overwrite option
Uses the option specified by the receiving system. This can be
dangerous to your files.
o Follow options in Transfer Receive dialog
The default. Uses your options specified in the Receive dialog.
You have somewhat more control.
- Crash recovery
This group consists of three radio buttons.
o Negotiate
The default. This lets recovery occur when file recovery is
enabled at the remote system.
o Never
Prevents recovery from occurring, even if the remote system has
file recovery enabled.
o Always
File recovery will occur if the remote system has recovery set
to enable or negotiate.
o Sending
o Append/Overwrite options
This drop-down list has eight options:
- None
The default. Use with systems that don't support Zmodem Management
options.
- Newer or longer
Overwrites if file sent has newer time/date or larger size.
- CRC differs
Overwrites if file sent has different contents.
- Append to file
Adds file sent to end of existing file.
- Overwrite always
Overwrites any file having same name as file sent.
- Newer
Overwrites if file sent has a more recent time/date.
- Length or date differs
Overwrites if file sent has different size or time/date.
- Refuse
Rejects file sent if its name matches any existing file.
o Crash recovery
This group consists of three radio buttons.
- Negotiate
The default. Lets recovery occur when file recovery is enabled at
the remote system.
- One time
Allows recovery during the next file transfer only, after which the
setting reverts to Negotiate. Prevents inadvertent file recovery,
which can damage files.
- Always
File recovery will occur if the remote system has recovery set to
enable or negotiate.
o Transmission
- Method
This group enabless you to specify error detection and recovery
procedures when you're sending files. The Zmodem protocol lets the
sending system choose whether or not to wait for positive
acknowledgment from the receiving system before sending additional
blocks. If the sending system chooses to wait for acknowledgment, it
can also choose how often it waits. Alternatively, the sending
system can stream data until transmission is complete or it receives
a negative acknowledgment from the receiving system. Upon receipt of
a negative acknowledgment, the sender retransmits the failed block
and all subsequent blocks.
- Streaming
This radio button indicates that HyperACCESS Zmodem should send in
streaming mode (the default).
- Windowed
This radio button, with its associated drop-down list box, indicates
that you want Zmodem to stop and wait for acknowledgment when
necessary. The drop-down list provides options of 2K and 4K bytes.
- Packet
Use the spin button to set the number of bytes in each packet.
Larger packets mean faster transfers but slower recovery from
errors. Available packet sizes are: 32, 64, 128, 256, and 1024 (the
default). Packet size reduces automatically if necessary.
- CRC
Enables you to set the size of error-checking codes used; 16 (the
default) bits is usually adequate. Setting to 32 bits further
enhances reliability, at the expense of speed.
- Wait
This spin button sets how long Zmodem waits between attempts to
resend packets. Through networks, where the receiver might lag far
behind the sender, you might need to increase this setting. The
default setting is 15 seconds, with a range of 1 to 99 seconds.
- End-of-line conversion
Select this check box if you're transferring text files with a
system that requires a line feed character after each carriage
return, which is typical of UNIX systems. The default is unselected.
- Control sequences use escape codes
Select this check box if you want Zmodem to replace all control
codes with an equivalent series of noncontrol codes. This might be
necessary with networks or remote systems that have problems
transmitting control codes, such as UNIX systems through TCP/IP.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.80. Open File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Open File dialog box is a common browse dialog. It lets you select a drive,
directory, and file using drop-down lists.
A standard file browse dialog box always has the folowing components:
o Open Filename
o Type of file
o Directory
o Drive
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.81. Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Save As dialog box lets you change the filename or drive and directory to
use for the save.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 2.82. Select a Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Select a Directory dialog box lets you select the drive and directory only.
To select a directory, double-click the graphical diretory tree diagram until
the directory you are interested in appears above the directories list box.
Then click OK or press Enter.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3. Setup (Phase II) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Help for Phase II of Setup.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.1. User Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Information you enter in this dialog is needed for installation. It will also
be used to log you on to the Hilgraeve Customer Support BBS.
Use Tab to move from field to field.
Enter your name, the name of your company, your address, and the serial number
of the HyperACCESS program you are installing. You can find the serial number
on the registration card or HyperACCESS Disk 1. When ready, select Continue.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.2. Type of Connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select the type of connection you will use most often with HyperACCESS: Direct
Cable, Modem or Modem Pool, or TCP/IP.
If you need to change this selection later on, you can easily do so from within
HyperACCESS. You do not need to reinstall the program to change the type of
connection.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.3. Modem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Scroll the list to find the name of your modem. If it is in the list, select it
and then select OK.
If the name of your modem is not on the list, select Not Listed. A dialog will
be displayed where you can specify whether you want to pick a similar modem or
add the name of your modem to the list.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.4. Unlisted Modem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You selected Not Listed on the previous dialog because you were unable to find
the name of your modem in a list provided by HyperACCESS. Use this dialog to
specify whether you want to pick the name of a similar modem (one made by the
same manufacturer and with a similar baud rate, for example) or add your modem
to HyperAccess's list.
If you select Pick Similar Modem..., you will return to the Modem dialog that
you saw before.
If you select Add Modem to List..., the Name Modem dialog will be displayed.
Note: If you arrived at this dialog because the exact name of your modem
doesn't appear in the list, you are probably better off to choose Pick Similar
Modem. For example, if you have a BogusCom 14.4EX that isn't listed, you should
probably go back and pick an existing BogusCom 14.4HX entry. Select Add Modem
to List... if no similar modem name appears or if you don't believe an existing
entry is appropriate.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.5. Name Modem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this dialog to add the name of your modem to the HyperACCESS list. You can
use the official name or you can make up a name.
You must enter a name before selecting OK.
If you select Exit, you will end the Setup program.
Note: Modems defined using the Not Listed... button are stored in the file
USERMDM.TXT. You can change the name, setup strings, and settings for these
modems by editing that file directly. The beginning of the file lists
guidelines for the proper format of modem entries within the file.
This feature provides additional flexibility in managing user-defined modems
beyond what can be achieved directly through the HyperACCESS user interface.
For example, you can provide a USERMDM.TXT file to other HyperACCESS users so
they can use modems you have defined. The file also enables you to specify
additional settings beyond those available in the user interface, such as the
message your modem displays when it establishes a connection.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.6. Duplicate Modem Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The name you entered in the Name Modem dialog is the same as that of a modem
already in the HyperACCESS list. You have two choices:
o Select Use Listed Modem to use the modem name already in the list.
o Select Enter Different Name... to specify a name not in the list.
After you enter a unique modem name, the Modem Setup dialog will be
displayed where you can enter modem setup strings and settings, or accept
the defaults.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.7. Modem Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Modem Setup dialog initially displays default information that you can
change. The following information is shown:
o Modem name
The name of your modem as you entered it in the Name Modem dialog. This
text is read-only in this dialog.
o Modem Setup strings
The setup string initially shown (1st string) is for a Hayes-compatible
modem. There are fields for three more initialization strings.
o Default baud rate
The default baud rate, shown in a drop-down list, is 2400 bits per
second.
o Use hardware handshaking for flow control
This check box is not checked initially.
Although these settings will work with most modems, to operate sophisticated
modems at their potential, changes are almost always necessary. To help you
make appropriate changes, background information is included in this help
topic. The setup strings and settings you enter in this dialog become the
default values for your modem.
When you have finished making changes, select OK to close this dialog. The
About Initialization Strings
An initialization string is a series of modem commands that software uses to
configure a modem. Commands may be broken into two or more initialization
strings to avoid exceeding the modem's maximum line length. In this dialog,
you can enter up to four setup strings. Each string can be up to 40 characters
long.
The following information about Hilgraeve's predefined modem initialization
strings is presented only as a guideline. You should refer to your modem
manual for strings that follow these guidelines and are appropriate for your
modem.
Each time you place a call, HyperACCESS's predefined modem initialization
strings begin by returning the modem to its factory default settings. Next,
the strings set every detail necessary to ensure compatibility with
HyperACCESS and the broadest possible range of remote systems. This
configuration procedure is recommended as the most reliable and "well-behaved"
approach in today's multitasking and networked environments, where the modem's
configuration can be changed by other users or other applications without
notice.
The predefined initialization strings that HyperACCESS uses generally set the
following details:
o Recall the modem's factory defaults (typically AT&F).
o Echo commands (typically E1V1Q0).
o Use extended AT commands (typically X3).
o Use CD and DTR signals (typically &C1&D2).
o Use hardware handshaking RTS/CTS signals (may be &R1, &K1, &K3, or an
S-register).
o Use constant baud rate between PC and modem (may be \J0 or an
S-register).*
o Pass Xoff/Xon characters transparently (typically \X1).*
o Negotiate with remote modem for highest connection speed and error
correction mode (may be \N2, \N3, \N4, or an S-register).*
*Applies only to modems that support speeds above 2400 bps.
About Baud Rates
The default OS/2 communications driver supports speeds up to 57600 bps. If you
use another driver, refer to its documentation for information on its
capabilities.
To support modems that incorporate data compression, you should generally set
this value to the next baud rate above your modem's rated speed. For example,
with 9600 or 14400 modems, you should set to 19200, and with 28800 modems, you
should set to 34800.
About Hardware Handshaking
Hardware handshaking is the process by which a computer uses lines in the
RS-232 cable, in addition to those that carry serial data, to indicate to
another computer when it is ready to accept data.
Flow control is a means by which a computer or device that is receiving data
can command the computer or device that is sending data to suspend and resume
sending. Typical means of flow control are XON/XOFF and hardware handshaking.
If your modem's speed is 9600 bps or greater, you should check Use hardware
handshaking for flow control.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix B, Modems, Communications Ports, and
Cables
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.8. Connect Through ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use this dialog to select the physical connection to your modem.
o Type of interface
This drop-down list shows valid connection types.
o Com Port
If you select Standard Com Port as the type of interface, either select
the port from the available list or click the Don't Know... button to
have HyperACCESS search for an appropriate port. Follow the instructions
in the Test Port dialog.
When you have completed making your selections, select OK. If you select Exit,
you will end the Setup program.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.9. Dialing Method ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This dialog enables you to specify whether you have Tone or Pulse dialing.
Typically, if you hear beeps when you dial a number, you have tone dialing. If
you hear clicks, you have pulse dialing. If you're not sure which button to
select, check with your telephone company or in-house telephone system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.10. Dialing Prefix ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The dialing prefix dialog enables you to enter a prefix to be used whenever you
dial from HyperACCESS. The number you enter here will be the default for all
phonebook entries. Enter a prefix here only if you want to use it for all
remote systems you call. For example, if you must dial 9 to get an outside
line, enter a 9 in the Dialing prefix box.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.11. Transfer Directories ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Transfer Directories dialog to specify directories that you want
HyperACCESS to use for receiving (downloading) and sending (uploading) files.
By default, DOWNLOAD and UPLOAD are the names of these directories. You can
enter other names if you like. The transfer directories will appear as folders
in the HyperACCESS folder at the completion of setup. If you specify only one
directory for both receiving and sending, only one folder will appear in the
HyperACCESS folder.
If the directories you enter do not exist, HyperACCESS creates them for you.
If you rerun Setup, the existing folders are updated to reflect directory names
entered during this execution of Setup.
Changes to the upload and download directories that you make from within HAOS2
do not affect the folders. However, if later on you want to change the names of
the transfer directories, you can do so by opening the folders' settings
notebooks and changing the directories. And you can change the folder labels
using standard OS/2 techniques.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.12. HyperACCESS Ready to Use ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Once you start using HyperACCESS, if you want to change the settings you
specified during Setup, simply select a Settings button or
Properties/Communications from a menu.
Select OK on this dialog to start using HyperACCESS.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.13. Cannot Find User Directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS cannot find the file HA.INI, the presence of which identifies the
user data directory. If you know the directory that contains HA.INI, enter it
in the Directory field. If you are not sure of the directory path, select the
Browse button to help you locate the file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.14. Directory Does Not Contain User Data Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The directory you entered does not appear to contain user data files. Unless
the directory includes user data files including HA.INI, HyperACCESS does not
recognize it. If you select Try Again, you will be returned to the previous
dialog, where you can enter another directory name.
If you select Use Anyway, HyperACCESS will try to make the directory into a
user data directory. It will create a default copy of HA.INI. It will restore
defaults in an existing DEFAULT.HAS file and place the New Phonebook Entry
Template in the Main Phonebook and Host Mode phonebook. If no DEFAULT.HAS file
exists, it will recreate this file. If other phonebook entries are present, it
will put them in the Main Phonebook. It will put the Host phonebook entry in
the Host Mode phonebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 3.15. Recreate DEFAULT.HAS? ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS cannot find the DEFAULT.HAS file, which is the New Phonebook Entry
Template. Although HyperACCESS prevents you from deleting this file, it might
have been removed, moved, or renamed from outside the program. Select OK to
have HyperACCESS recreate this file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4. Glossary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This glossary provides brief definitions of selected computer and
communications terms and abbreviations.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.1. Absolute path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A complete listing of the disk drive and directories used to store or retrieve
a file. It often includes the filename. Sometimes referred to as a fully
qualified path or filename, or full path.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.2. Accelerator key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See Shortcut key.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.3. Access ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To establish a connection and log on to a remote system. (verb)
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.4. Application icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A "picture" that is a graphical representation of an application. See also
icon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.5. ASCII ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for American Standard Code for Information Interchange. This
standard code consists of 7 data bits (or binary values) per character.
Letters, numbers, and special characters ($, #, %, and so on) are represented
by different ASCII codes. The basic ASCII character set represents 96 printable
characters and 32 nonprintable control characters. Additional characters, known
as extended ASCII characters, have been added over the years.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.6. Asynchronous ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A method of communicating characters between computers. With asynchronous
communications, characters can be sent without special coordination or control
characters. Contrast with Synchronous.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.7. Asynchronous adapter ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See Communications port.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.8. Autodial ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A modem feature that allows users to dial telephone numbers without using a
telephone. Commands for dialing can be manually entered from the computer
keyboard or automatically issued by a communications program.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.9. Backscroll Buffer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A special area of your computer's memory that contains a read-only image of the
data scrolled off the terminal screen. HyperACCESS displays the Backscroll
Buffer above the terminal area in the session window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.10. Baud rate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Although technically baud is the number of discrete signal changes that occur
per second on a data line, the term baud is now used interchangeably with the
term bits per second (bps). Hence, 1200 baud is the same as 1200 bps and
equates to a transmission rate of about 120 characters per second. A character
typically consists of 8 data bits, 1 start bit, and 1 stop bit.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.11. Binary ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A numbering system that is used by computers for storage of data. Binary
numbers are stored as a series of 0's and 1's. Each 0 or 1 is referred to as a
bit.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.12. Bit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The smallest unit of information used by computer systems. A bit is either on
or off, representing values 1 or 0, respectively. A series of 8 bits is called
a byte. ASCII characters are represented as one byte.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.13. Boot ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The process of starting a computer and loading its operating system from a
storage device into the computer's memory. Most computers boot automatically
when you turn them on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.14. bps ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for bits per second, a measure of data transmission speed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.15. Byte ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Eight bits that are treated as one unit of information. Within your computer,
numbers and characters are represented as bytes.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.16. Carrier Detect signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See CD.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.17. Cascade ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
An arrangement of all open windows, one on top of the other, so that title bars
remain visible. Contrast with Tile.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.18. CD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Carrier Detect. CD is an RS-232 signal from a modem to a
computer indicating that the modem has made a connection with a remote system.
CD is also known as DCD.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.19. Character ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Any alphabetic, numeric, or special character symbol. See also ASCII.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.20. Character length ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Also called data bits or bits per character, character length is the number of
bits required to represent a character. Standard ASCII characters have a
character length of 7 bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.21. Check box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, a square box next to a description of an option that you can turn on
and off. A check box contains a check mark if the option is selected (turned
on).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.22. Checksum ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A method of error checking that is sometimes used in Xmodem and other file
transfer protocols. A checksum is a calculated by both the sending and
receiving systems. The sending system transmits its calculated number. If the
checksum received differs from the receiving system's calculated number it,
requests retransmission of the block.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.23. Clear to Send signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See CTS.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.24. Click ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To press and release a mouse button (usually the left one) quickly. See also
Double-click.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.25. COM1, COM2, COM3, COM4 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Port names used to represent physical devices on your computer. COM1 and COM2
usually have their own connector on your computer to which your modem or other
peripheral devices are connected. Internal modems often have the ability to be
configured as COM3 or COM4 in addition to COM1 or COM2.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.26. Command button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, a button in a dialog box that performs a command, such as OK or
Cancel. Same as push button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.27. Communications port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The physical connection through which data are transferred into and out of a
computer. Also known as com port, port, serial port, or adapter.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.28. Compiling ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The process of converting a human-readable version of a program into a
machine-readable version that a computer can execute.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.29. Compression ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The process of reducing the total size of data by converting it to a more
compact format. HyperACCESS uses data compression whenever possible to transfer
files in the least amount of time.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.30. Configuration ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The term used to describe your computer hardware or settings of options that
change how your hardware or software behaves.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.31. Connect time ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The length of time that has elapsed between when you sign on to a remote system
and when you sign off.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.32. Context menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A context menu (also called pop-up menu) appears near the mouse pointer when
you click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) on an object or a blank
space on a window. The term context menu refers to the fact that the menu items
displayed depend on the location of the mouse pointer, the type of window
currently active, and the application.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.33. Control characters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Control characters are codes that are part of the ASCII character set. These
codes aren't usually printable or displayable on your screen. Control
characters include carriage return, line feed, and others.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.34. Control menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, the control menu contains commands that you can use to restore,
resize, move, maximize, minimize, and close a window. You can click on the
control menu box, normally located in the upper left-hand corner of a window,
to see the control menu. Sometimes called system menu, although the OS/2 system
menu includes options in addition to those for manipulating windows.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.35. CRC ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Cyclic Redundancy Check. CRC is the preferred method of error
checking used in Xmodem and other file transfer protocols. A CRC is calculated
by both the sending and receiving systems. The sending system transmits its
calculated number. If the CRC received differs from the receiving system's
calculated number, it requests retransmission of the block.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.36. CTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Clear To Send, which is an RS-232 signal from a modem to a
computer that indicates the remote system is ready to receive data.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.37. Cursor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The indicator on your display that shows where characters you type will appear
on the screen. In a GUI, the cursor may be displayed in various ways, such as
an insertion point, mouse pointer, or underline character.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.38. Data bits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The number of bits, usually 7 or 8, in a data word. See also bit, start bits,
parity, and stop bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.39. Data Carrier Detect signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See CD or DCD.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.40. Data Terminal Ready signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See DTR.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.41. Data word ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The combination of start bits, data bits, parity bits, and stop bits is called
the data word. One data word is used to represent each character of transmitted
data. See also bit, start bits, data bits, parity, and stop bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.42. DCD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See CD.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.43. DCE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Data Communications Equipment, which identifies the specific
type of RS-232 port that is commonly found on peripheral equipment such as
modems. Contrast with DTE.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.44. Default drive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The disk drive that is assumed unless you explicitly specify the letter of a
different drive.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.45. Dialog ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A window that displays options for you to select or a message for you to
respond to.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.46. DOS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Disk Operating System. It is frequently used as a generic
description for MS-DOS, PC-DOS, and other equivalent disk operating systems.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.47. Double-click ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To press a mouse button twice in rapid succession.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.48. Download ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The process of receiving a file from another computer. Upload means to send a
file to another computer. Because some people find the terms download and
upload confusing, HyperACCESS uses the terms send and receive.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.49. Drag ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To move an object by pressing and holding down a mouse button while moving the
mouse.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.50. Drop-down combination box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In OS/2, a text box that displays the current choice. A drop-down list of
alternatives is hidden until you click on the underlined arrow in the square at
the right. You can select a different choice or type another choice in the box.
The text you type does not have to match any of the choices in the list. Also
called drop-down list box.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.51. DSR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Data Set Ready. DSR is an RS-232 signal from a modem to a
computer indicating that the data set (modem) is ready to communicate.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.52. DTE ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Data Terminal Equipment, which identifies the specific type of
RS-232 port that is commonly found on personal computers and terminals.
Contrast with DCE.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.53. DTR ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Data Terminal Ready. DTR is an RS-232 signal from a computer
to a modem indicating that the data terminal (computer) is ready to receive
data. It is used to force the modem to disconnect (hang up) from a remote
system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.54. Echo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The process whereby a computer sends back a duplicate of each received
character to the computer that sent the character. In communications with most
remote dial-up systems, characters you type on your keyboard will be echoed
back to you by the remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.55. Electronic mail ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Messages sent from by users from one computer to another through telephone
lines. Often called E-mail.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.56. Emulate ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To enable a computer to simulate the behavior of a terminal.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.57. Flow control ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A means by which a computer or device that is receiving data can command the
computer or device that is sending data to suspend and resume sending. Typical
means of flow control are XON/XOFF and hardware handshaking.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.58. Formatting ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The process performed by DOS or OS/2 FORMAT, which prepares (initializes) a
disk to accept files. Also the process of arranging data or text, as in an
editor.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.59. Full duplex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A mode of communications whereby characters you type are sent directly to the
remote computer without first being displayed on your screen. The characters
are displayed on your screen only after the remote system has sent an echo of
the characters back to you.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.60. GND ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for GrouND signal. GND is an RS-232 signal that serves as a signal
ground between a computer and a modem.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.61. Ground signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See GND.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.62. GUI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Graphical User Interface. A computer's user interface includes
all the points at which the user and the computer communicate with each other.
Lights, sound, keyboard, mouse, and screen can all be parts of the personal
computer user interface. The screen part of the user interface can be
text-based, such as the command interface of DOS. When it uses pictures and
symbols to communicate (for example, OS/2, the Apple Macintosh, and Microsoft
Windows), the user interface becomes a graphical user interface, or GUI.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.63. Half duplex ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A mode of communications whereby characters you type are displayed on your
screen as they are being sent. The remote computer does not echo characters you
type when you are using half duplex.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.64. Hardware handshaking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A process by which a computer uses lines in the RS-232 cable, in addition to
those that carry serial data, to indicate to another computer when it is ready
to accept data.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.65. Hexadecimal (HEX) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A number system using base 16. (Decimal numbers use base 10 and binary numbers
use base 2.) Each digit in a number system must represent values from zero to
the base minus 1. For example, binary digits are 0 and 1. Decimal digits are 0,
1, 2,..., 9. Hexadecimal digits are: 0, 1, 2,..., 9, A, B, C, D, E, F. The
hexadecimal number system is convenient for modern computers because it takes
four bits to represent a hexadecimal digit. Therefore, two hex digits represent
a byte.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.66. Hide button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A control in the upper-right of a window that you click to remove the window
from the OS/2 desktop. The Hide button appears as a small box with a broken
outline. Display the Window List to see a list of all open windows, including
those that are hidden or minimized. See also Maximize button, Minimize button ,
Restore button .
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.67. Host system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A computer or computer service (other than the one on which you're running
HyperACCESS) with which you can establish a connection and exchange data. It
accepts calls and responds to commands that the caller types on a terminal or
on a computer that is acting as a terminal. Same as remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.68. HyperProtocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
An error-free, streaming file transfer protocol developed by Hilgraeve.
HyperProtocol is very fast over noisy or noise-free connections despite
propagation delays common with long-distance calls, high-speed modems, X.25 and
packet-switching networks.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.69. HyperViewer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A bitmap viewer included in HyperACCESS that automatically displays GIF images
as you download them. You can use HyperViewer to display graphics files that
are in other formats after you receive the files.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.70. Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A picture that is a graphical representation of an element in a GUI.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.71. Initialization string ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A series of modem commands that software uses to configure a modem. HyperACCESS
has predefined initialization strings for hundreds of popular modems. You may
add to or change these predefined strings, or define strings for other modems.
Also called setup string.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.72. Insertion point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, the flashing vertical bar usually displayed in a text box to indicate
the place where you can type or edit information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.73. Int 14h ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Int 14h refers to the standard interrupt vector used to support communications
hardware/software. HyperACCESS supports Int 14h redirection in conjunction with
special redirection software provided by other vendors.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.74. ISDN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Integrated Services Digital Network, a digital transmission
technology that enables voice and high-speed data communications to be
multiplexed on a single telephone line.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.75. Keyboard macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See Macro.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.76. LAN ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Local Area Network
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.77. List box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, a rectangular box that displays a column of available choices. If
additional choices are available that are not initially displayed, the list box
has a scroll bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.78. Log on ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Log on is a verb, meaning to type a user identification and password as
necessary to access a computer system. Logon is a noun, describing the activity
of logging on or the information you type when logging on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.79. Macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
An automatic sequence that issues multiple keystrokes or characters when you
enter a single keystroke or key combination.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.80. Maximize button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In OS/2, the maximize button is the larger box in the upper right-hand corner
of a window. You click it to enlarge the window to fill the entire screen. See
also Hide button, Minimize button, Restore button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.81. Memory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Usually refers to a storage area inside the computer where programs execute and
data can be copied, held, and retrieved.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.82. Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A list of choices, which are usually commands.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.83. Menu bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, a horizontal bar that displays the name of each menu for the
application, such as File and View.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.84. Message Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A special window, available from the HyperACCESS Terminal panel, that can be
used to create and manipulate text. In addition to online help for Message Pad,
see the HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 5, HyperACCESS Reference, for more
information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.85. Minimize button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A small box in the upper-right of a window that you click to reduce the window
to its smallest size. Use the Settings notebook to specify whether minimized
windows should be placed on the OS/2 desktop or in the Minimized Window Viewer.
See also Hide button, Maximize button, Restore button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.86. Modem ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A device that allows communications between two computers through telephone
lines. The term modem is derived from MOdulator/DEModulator. A modulator
converts digital signals from the computer into audio signals that can be
transmitted over telephone lines. A demodulator converts audio signals back to
digital signals.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.87. Mouse pointer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, the mouse pointer is usually an arrow (but may have other shapes),
controlled and displayed by an installed mouse pointing device.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.88. NASI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Network Asynchronous Services Interface provided by Novell for accessing shared
communications ports.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.89. NCSI ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Network Communications Services Interface provided by Network Products, Inc.
for accessing shared communications ports.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.90. Null modem cable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
An RS-232 cable that allows the DTE ports of two computers to be directly
connected to each other. A null modem cable has female connectors at both ends.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.91. Offline ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A term for a computer system's not being connected to another system for the
purpose of communications. Contrast with online.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.92. Online ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A term for a computer's being connected with a remote computer for the purpose
of communications. Contrast with offline.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.93. Option button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, a circular button that selects an option from a list of mutually
exclusive items. The selected option contains a dark dot. You click on an
option button to select a different option. Same as radio button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.94. Parity ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A bit having a value of 0 or 1 that is added to a character as the character is
sent. The receiving system can use the parity bit as a means of detecting
errors in the character. The parity bit added makes the sum of bits in a data
word either an odd number (odd parity) or an even number (even parity). See
also bit, start bits, data bits, and stop bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.95. Path name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A listing of nested directories used to store or retrieve a file. For details,
see your OS/2 or DOS manual.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.96. Peripheral device ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A device that is connected to a computer for supplying input and/or accepting
output from the computer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.97. Point ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To move a mouse until its pointer is on an object or choice.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.98. Pop-up menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A pop-up menu appears near the mouse pointer when you click mouse button 2 (by
default, the right button) on an object or a blank space on a window. The menu
contains options appropriate for the object or window you clicked on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.99. Port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See Communications port.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.100. Push button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A rectangle containing text or graphics, or both, representing a choice that
will be activated when you select it.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.101. Radio buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, a set of circles used to display mutually exclusive choices. The
selected radio button has a dark circle in the middle.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.102. RD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Receive Data. RD is an RS-232 signal that carries data from a
modem to a computer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.103. Reboot ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To restart a computer or to reload its operating system from a storage device,
such as a disk, into a computer's memory. With microcomputers, you reboot by
pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del, by pushing a reset button on the computer, or by turning
the power off and back on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.104. Receive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The process of receiving a file from another computer. Because some people find
the term download confusing, HyperACCESS and this manual use the term receive.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.105. Receive Data signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See RD.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.106. Relative path ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A listing of directories used to store or retrieve a file. A relative path
assumes that the current drive and directory are the starting point for the
path. It often includes the filename.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.107. Remote system ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A computer or computer service (other than the one on which you are running
HyperACCESS) with which you can establish a connection and exchange data. It
accepts calls and responds to commands that the caller types on a terminal or
on a computer that is acting as a terminal. Same as host system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.108. Request To Send signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See RTS.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.109. Restore button ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When a window has been maximized, the maximize button in the upper right of the
window becomes a restore button. Its symbol is a small box with an additional
vertical line on the right and left sides. Click the restore button to return
the window to the size it was before itwas maximized. See also Hide button,
Maximize button, Minimize button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.110. Ring indicator signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See RNG.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.111. RNG ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for RiNG indicator. RNG is an RS-232 signal from a modem to a
computer indicating that the telephone is ringing. Sometimes called ring
detect.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.112. RS-232 cable ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A standard type of cable adopted by the Electronic Industries Association (EIA)
to ensure uniformity of interfacing signals between two computers and/or
peripherals. RS-232 cables typically plug into male or female 9-pin or 25-pin D
sockets on your computer, modem, or other peripheral devices.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.113. RTS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Request To Send. RTS is an RS-232 signal from a computer to a
modem that indicates the computer has data to send to a remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.114. Scroll bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A window component that indicates more information is available in the
direction of highlighted arrows. A vertical scroll bar, when it appears, is on
the right-hand side of a window. A horizontal scroll bar, when it appears, is
at the bottom of a window.
Each scroll bar contains a scroll box, which you can move by dragging (see
Drag) in the direction of the information you want to see. You can also click
on the bar or the arrow buttons to scroll the information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.115. Select ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To mark an item by clicking (see Click) it with a mouse or highlighting it
using keyboard commands.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.116. Serial port ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See Communications port.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.117. Server ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
On a network, a computer that provides specialized services to other computers
on the network. Among services provided by servers are: shared printers,
databases, and communications. Some servers are dedicated to providing their
specialized service; others provide multiple services or are also used as
workstations.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.118. Shortcut key ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A key combination or sequence that can be used in place of selecting a menu
choice.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.119. Sign-on (or Sign on) ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS uses the terms log on and logon, in place of sign on and sign-on.
See Log on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.120. Software handshaking ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A method by which a system that is receiving data can send control characters
to the computer that is sending, to indicate when it is ready to receive data.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.121. Start bits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Bits that are added to the beginning of a data character during asynchronous
communications. See also bit, data bits, parity, and stop bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.122. Stop bits ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Bits that are added to the end of a data character during asynchronous
communications. See also bit, start bits, data bits, and parity .
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.123. Streaming ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A method of data transmission that lets the sending system transmit data until
all are sent or it receives a negative acknowledgment from the receiving
system. Upon receipt of a negative acknowledgment, the sender retransmits the
failed block and all subsequent blocks.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.124. Synchronous ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A method of communicating characters between modems. With synchronous
communications, the two modems coordinate transmission using special sequences
of control characters. See Asynchronous communications.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.125. Syntax ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The rules governing the use of a programming language.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.126. System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In HyperACCESS, a computer with which you can communicate through a modem,
cable, or other communications device.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.127. System list ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The directory of remote systems that appears as the Phonebook in HyperACCESS.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.128. System menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See window pop-up menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.129. TCP/IP ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A network protocol primarily used by UNIX workstations, servers, and some
mainframe computers. Other vendors provided software to interface PCs to these
networks. HyperACCESS provides a Telenet interface to UNIX workstations through
TCP/IP.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.130. Telenet ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A communications interface between computers. Telenet is typically used to
access UNIX workstations and some main frame computers.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.131. TD ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Abbreviation for Transmit Data, an RS-232 signal that carries data from a
computer to a modem.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.132. Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A device consisting of keyboard and screen that can be connected to a host
computer to allow you to operate the host computer. Typically, the function of
communications software is to make your computer act like, or emulate, a
terminal.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.133. Terminal emulation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A feature that allows a computer to mimic the behavior of various types of
terminals.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.134. Text box ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A rectangular box in a GUI into which you type information, such as a phone
number.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.135. Text editor ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A program that you use to create and edit files that contain displayable or
printable text. OS/2 includes two text editors: the System Editor and the
Enhanced Editor.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.136. Text file ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A file containing ASCII characters. These characters are normally printable.
For certain applications, control characters are embedded in the text to inform
the program that is processing the text to take some action.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.137. Tile ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
An arrangement of open windows in which no windows overlap and all are at least
partially visible. Contrast with Cascade.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.138. Title bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, the title bar appears at the top of the window, identifying that
window with a title, such as HyperACCESS for OS/2. The title bar of an active
window is displayed in a different color or intensity than inactive windows.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.139. Transmit Data signal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
See TD.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.140. TTY ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
TTY stands for Teletype. A Teletype terminal is the simplest type of
telecommunications terminal and is compatible with more remote systems than any
other. Its distinguishing feature is that data come onto its screen one line at
a time, similar to the way the data would be reproduced on a printer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.141. UNIX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A multitasking/multiuser operating system originally developed by American
Telephone and Telegraph. UNIX primarily appears on engineering workstations and
scientific computers.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.142. Upload ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To send a file to another computer (contrast with Download). Because some users
find the terms upload and download confusing, HyperACCESS uses the terms send
and receive.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.143. Wildcard characters ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Wildcard characters, also known as global file name characters, are the symbols
* and ?, which represent unknown or unspecified characters in filenames. See a
DOS manual for details.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.144. Window pop-up menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A list of choices relating to an object, a window, or window contents. You can
open a window pop-up menu by clicking the left mouse button on the title bar
icon at the upper left of the window. Sometimes called system menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.145. Window title ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, the window title appears in the title bar at the top of the window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.146. Windowed transmission ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A method of data transmission that sends one or more packets and then waits for
acknowledgment from the receiving system. The opposite of streaming.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.147. Workspace ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
In a GUI, the workspace is the window area you use to work with and display
information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.148. Workstation ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
On a network, a computer that is used by a person.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.149. Xmodem protocol ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Xmodem is the most commonly used name for an error-free file transfer protocol
developed by Ward Christensen. In this protocol, data are transferred as blocks
along with error-checking codes. ASCII control characters are used to
synchronize the transfer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 4.150. XON/XOFF ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A method of flow control or software handshaking used primarily during transfer
of text or textlike data.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5. Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Context-sensitive help for menu choices.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.1. Main Phonebook Panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Main Phonebook panel displays phonebook entries and various menus and
controls for interacting with the panel. You'll probably find that double-
clicking on a phonebook entry is the easiest way to begin a communications
session; however, there are other techniques. For example, you can drag the
phonebook entry and drop it on the Terminal tab, or you can use the File menu
to begin a communications session.
The All tab displays all entries in the current phonebook sorted
alphabetically. Selecting an individual tab letter displays a sheet with only
those entries that have names beginning with that letter.
If you can't see all the tabs, use the double-arrow buttons (to the left and
right of the tabs) to scroll the tabs. These buttons don't change the selected
tab. The left and right single-arrow buttons (in the upper-right corner of the
top sheet of the phonebook panel) enable you to move the selected tab one
position at a time. The letter selected changes with each click of one of these
buttons.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.2. Phonebook File Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the phonebook panel File menu for adding and deleting Phonebook entries,
beginning a communications session, and exiting HyperACCESS.
The File menu is different for other panels.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.3. New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Regardless of the phonebook entry selected, New... displays the Description
dialog, where you enter a phonebook entry name, select or add an icon, and
specify a phonebook and terminal emulator. HyperACCESS then displays the
Communications dialog, where you can change any of the default settings. This
new entry uses settings from the Phonebook entry New Phonebook Entry Template.
When you have finished entering information in the Communications dialog, click
OK to close the dialog and return to the displayed Terminal panel. Cancel
closes the dialog without canceling the new phonebook entry.
Opening a new phonebook entry or exiting HyperACCESS automatically saves your
new phonebook entry. HyperACCESS creates a filename based on the phonebook
entry name you entered in the Description dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.4. Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Open... displays the Terminal panel with the name of the selected phonebook
entry in the title bar and sets communications parameters to those of the
entry. It does not connect to the communications port or dial the phone number.
Note: You can open the New Phonebook Entry Template and modify default settings
from the Terminal panel. However, you can't connect to a remote system or type
in the Terminal panel when the New Phonebook Entry Template is open
(HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog if you attempt either of these actions).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.5. File Menu - Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Save as... from the File menu to save the selected phonebook entry with
a new name that you specify. It displays the Description dialog. When you enter
a phonebook entry name, select an icon, and click OK, HyperACCESS creates a
phonebook entry filename with an HAO extension, and displays the standard Save
As dialog. This dialog enables you to change the filename, drive, and directory
to use for the save.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.6. File - Import... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Import... to import phonebook entry files that don't currently appear in
the phonebook. This menu choice displays the Import File browse dialog where
you can select a drive, directory, and file. Unlike other browse dialogs,
Import File enables you to make multiple selections from the file list. Once
you select one or more phonebook entry files, HyperACCESS displays the entry in
the current phonebook.
Note: You can also perform an import by dragging a phonebook entry file
(usually with an HAO extension) from an OS/2 drive folder onto the phonebook
panel on which you want it to appear.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.7. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Delete... removes an entry from the phonebook. This menu choice displays a
warning dialog with the following choices:
o Remove from Phonebook
Removes the entry from the phonebook, but doesn't delete its file from
the disk.
o Delete from Disk
Removes the entry from the phonebook and deletes its file from the disk.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.8. Connect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Connect opens the Terminal panel, makes a connection, and dials the phone
number (if appropriate).
You can specify the amount of time to wait for a carrier signal, number of and
time between retries, and the volume of your modem speaker in the Dialing
Details dialog. You access this dialog when applicable for the connection
device (for example, a modem) by clicking the Dialing Details... button in the
Communications properties sheet.
When you select a phonebook entry that doesn't have a phone number for
connection devices that require one, HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog that
tells you to enter a phone number and displays the Communications dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.9. Connect and Record Logon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Connect and Record Logon records a logon sequence to use for future
connections. This menu choice displays the Terminal panel and the Recording in
Progress window, and dials the phone number (if one exists) or displays a
warning and Communications dialogs to obtain the number. Once HyperACCESS
establishes connection with the remote system, you must manually log on to the
system.
HyperACCESS begins learning your keystrokes as soon as you're connected to the
remote system. When you complete all commands you want HyperACCESS to learn,
select Stop! from the menu bar of the Recording in Progress window.
Related Information
For more information, see HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 6, Automation
Tools.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.10. Connect But Skip Logon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Connect but Skip Logon ignores a standard logon script that was previously
recorded. It displays the Terminal panel and dials the phone number (if one
exists) or displays a warning and the Communications dialogs to obtain the
number. Once HyperACCESS establishes connection with the remote system, you
must manually log on to the system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.11. Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Properties to specify various settings for HyperACCESS. This menu choice
displays a cascade menu of properties sheets. Among parameters you specify
through Properties sheets are names and icons for phonebook entries;
communications settings such as connection and phone number; terminal emulator
and custom settings for the emulator; ASCII receiving and sending parameters;
file transfer protocols; paths used for logon program, capture file, and log
file; and default preferences for mouse behavior, fonts, colors and other
settings.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.12. File - Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Exit to end the current session of HyperACCESS. If there is an active
connection with a remote system, HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.13. Phonebook Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Phonebook menu to create or delete phonebooks. You can also copy a
phonebook or rename it.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.14. Phonebook Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Phonebook Name... to display the Phonebook Name dialog, where you can
change the name of the current phonebook. The phonebook tab permits names up to
32 characters long.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.15. Phonebook - New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
New... displays the Phonebook Name dialog, where you can specify the name of a
new phonebook. When you enter a new name and click OK, HyperACCESS displays a
blank phonebook panel with a tab that shows the new name. The phonebook tab
permits names up to 32 characters long. The only phonebook entry in your new
phonebook is the New Phonebook Entry Template.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.16. Phonebook - Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Copy to copy in one action all phonebook entries from the current
phonebook to another phonebook. It displays the Phonebook Name dialog so you
can specify the name of the destination phonebook. If the destination phonebook
doesn't exist, HyperACCESS creates it, and the phonebook tab shows the new
name. You can't copy to an existing phonebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.17. Phonebook - Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Delete removes the phonebook panel. This menu choide displays a confirmation
dialog. When you click OK, HyperACCESS deletes the phonebook panel. This
selection doesn't delete the files of the phonebook entries contained in the
deleted phonebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.18. Phonebook View Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Phonebook View menu includes choices for customizing the way HyperACCESS
displays the current phonebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.19. Phonebook View - Refresh Now ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Refresh now to redisplay all current communications sessions.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.20. Phonebook View - Icons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When Icons is selected (the default), this menu choice displays a check mark,
and you'll see a phonebook panel with icons representing the phonebook entries.
Each icon and associated phonebook entry name identifies a remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.21. Phonebook View - Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With Details selected (checked), you'll see columns of text instead of an
icon-based panel. The details displayed are values specified in the
Communications properties sheet, plus the logon program file from the File
Usage properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.22. Phonebook View - Entry Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With Entry Names selected (checked), each phonebook entry in your phonebook is
displayed in a multi-column list format with only the phonebook entry name
shown.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.23. Phonebook View - File Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With File names selected (checked), the phonebook displays each entry with its
icon and full path including drive, directory, and filename.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.24. Phonebook View - Button Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With Button Bar selected (checked), the button bar appears below the menu bar.
The Main Phonebook buttons are New, Open, Dial, Record, Settings, View. To
remove the button bar, unselect this menu choice. The selection you make
(whether to display the Button Bar or not) applies to all panels, although the
buttons displayed are different from panel to panel.
To see help text for a button, simply place the mouse pointer over the button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.25. Phonebook View - Status Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Status Bar displays the status bar at the bottom of
the window. This is the default. Clicking on this selected menu choice removes
the check mark and status bar. The selection you make applies to all panels.
The status bar has five fields. From left to right, they are:
o Modem LEDs
Simulates the most common front panel indicator lights on external
modems. You can control whether this feature displays by selecting Modem
LEDs from the View menu.
o Connect status
If connected to a port, this field displays the word Connected and the
elapsed time for the current connection in hours, minutes, and seconds.
If HyperACCESS isn't connected to a port, this field displays the word
Disconnected.
o Terminal emulation
Displays the terminal emulator for this session; the Scroll Lock
indicator (SL) when Scroll Lock is on; the Num Lock indicator (NL) when
Num Lock is on; the Caps Lock indicator (CL) when Caps Lock is on; and
the Capture indicator (Capt) when you've selected Capture to file or
(Prn) for Capture to printer. When HyperACCESS is executing a program,
this field displays the program filename.
o Communications settings
Displays the baud rate, number of data bits, parity, and number of stop
bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.26. Phonebook View - Modem LEDs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Modem LEDs includes the Modem LED display in the
status bar at the bottom of the window. The selection you make applies to all
panels.
This feature simulates the most common front panel indicator lights on external
modems. With devices other than modems, such as direct cable connections, the
LEDs indicate equivalent status information.
The modem LEDs are:
o AA
Auto Answer
o CD
Carrier Detect
o OH
Off Hook
o RD
Receive Data
o SD
Send Data
o TR
Terminal Ready
o MR
Modem Ready
Note: A modem's MR indicator cannot be read by software, so HyperACCESS
infers this state from the modem's DSR (Data Set Ready) signal.
Note: The LED display closely matches actual modem indicators, but it's not
precisely in sync, due to OS/2 communications drivers and buffering.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.27. Phonebook View - Panel Tabs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Panel tabs displays the tabs at the bottom of each
panel. When Panel tabs is not selected, you must use the Window menu to change
the current panel. The selection you make applies to all panels.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.28. Phonebook Options Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Phonebook Options menu enables you to specify external utilities and sounds
that you want HyperACCESS to use.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.29. Phonebook Options - External Utilities ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select External Utilities to change the text viewer and clipboard viewer
programs used by HyperACCESS. By default, HyperACCESS uses the OS/2 Enhanced
Editor and Clipboard.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.30. Phonebook Options - Sound ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Sound... to display the Sound dialog. You can specify whether you want
HyperACCESS to use multimedia sound, system beeps, or silent operation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.31. Phonebook Automation Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Automation menu provides four choices for automating HyperACCESS operation:
Run, Abort, Edit Program, Buttons. These choices are a subset of the Terminal
panel Automation menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.32. Phonebook Automation - Run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Run... to display a standard file browse dialog, where you can select a
drive, directory, and file to run a program. The file you select can be an
automatically generated REXX program, or any .EXE program that uses the
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface (HAPI).
Related Information
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface Manual
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.33. Phonebook Automation - Abort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Abort to terminate the automatic program being run. This choice is
dimmed or grayed out (unavailable) unless a program is executing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.34. Phonebook Automation - Edit Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Edit Program... to display a standard file browse dialog where you can
select a drive, directory, and file that contains the source program you want
to edit. When selected, the file is opened in OS/2's System (or Enhanced)
Editor, or whichever editor (text viewer) you've specified in the External
Utilities dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.35. Phonebook Automation - Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Buttons... to display a dialog where you can define or modify
system-defined buttons that appear in the button bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.36. Phonebook Window Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Window menu enables you to select another HyperACCESS panel for display:
Terminal, Main Phonebook, Host Mode, Call Log, Lists. You can use this menu to
make another panel active when the panel tabs are not displayed. The currently
active panel appears with a check mark.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.37. Phonebook Window - Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Terminal to display the Terminal panel where you interact with the
remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.38. Phonebook Window - Main Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Main Phonebook to display the phonebook panel containing the default
phonebook. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.39. Phonebook Window - Host Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Host Mode to display the phonebook panel containing host mode phonebook
entries. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.40. Phonebook Window - Other Phonebooks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Any additional phonebooks that you create appear in this menu. The name that
appears in the list is the same name that appears on the panel tab.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.41. Phonebook Window - Call Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Call Log to display the Call Log panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.42. Phonebook Window - Lists ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Lists to display the Lists panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.43. Help Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Help to display a list of help choices.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.44. Help Menu - Help Index ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Help index to display an alphabetic listing of help topics for
HyperACCESS that includes dialogs, procedures, a glossary, and menu choices.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.45. Help Menu - General Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select General help to display an overview of the features and functions of
HyperACCESS for OS/2.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.46. Help Menu - Using Help ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Using help to display information about how to use the mouse or keyboard
to get help.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.47. Help Menu - Product Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Product information to display the HyperACCESS for OS/2 copyright and
information about Hilgraeve.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.48. Terminal Panel Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Each menu on the Terminal panel menu bar provides control over the Terminal
panel and how it's used or displayed. Briefly, the menus are:
o File gives you some of the same capabilities as the phonebook panel File
menu. For example, you can begin a communications session and exit
HyperACCESS. In addition, you can disconnect a session or capture
interaction with the remote system to a file or printer.
o Edit enables you to copy and paste text. It also features a search
capability with the Find... menu item.
o View enables you to customize various features for the Terminal panel.
From this menu choice, you can display the Message Pad window and specify
how you want the HyperACCESS window to appear.
o Properties displays menu choices that open sheets of the Properties
notebook. These sheets enable you to change various communications
parameters pertaining to this entry, such as name, phone number, terminal
emulation, and so on.
o Transfer enables you to send (upload) and receive (download) files.
o Automation enables you to learn or run programs and set up custom keys
and buttons.
o Window enables you to display different HyperACCESS panels.
o Help provides additional information on how to use HyperACCESS.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.49. Terminal File Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Terminal panel File menu is useful for opening, closing, and saving
phonebook entries, connecting and disconnecting from a remote system, capturing
and printing remote system interaction, and exiting from HyperACCESS.
The File menu is different when it's selected from a phonebook panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.50. Terminal File - New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Regardless of the phonebook entry selected, New... displays the Description
dialog, where you enter a phonebook entry name, select or add an icon, and
specify a phonebook and terminal emulator. HyperACCESS then displays the
Communications dialog, where you can change any of the default settings. This
new entry uses settings from the New Phonebook Entry Template.
When you have finished entering information in the Communications dialog, click
OK to close the dialog and return to the displayed Terminal panel. Cancel
closes the dialog without canceling the new phonebook entry.
Opening a new phonebook entry or exiting HyperACCESS automatically saves your
new phonebook entry. HyperACCESS creates a filename based on the phonebook
entry name you entered in the Description dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.51. Terminal File - Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Open... to display the Open browse dialog where you can locate and open
any phonebook entry file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.52. Terminal File - Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Save to use the existing phonebook entry file to save the current
entry's options and parameters. If the session is untitled, you'll see the Save
As dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.53. Terminal File - Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Save As... to display the Description dialog with the name Untitled.
Enter a name, select an icon, phonebook, and entry type, and click OK..
HyperACCESS then displays a standard Save As dialog. The Save as filename edit
field displays a proposed filename, derived from the phonebook entry name. You
can enter any filename (with or without an extension). However, if you enter
any extension other than HAO you'll see a message warning you that systems
saved to files with extensions other than HAO do not appear in the phonebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.54. Terminal File - Connect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Connect to have HyperACCESS connect to the port and dial the phone
number (if appropriate). This choice is grayed out (unavailable) if HyperACCESS
is already connected to a remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.55. Terminal File - Connect and Record Logon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Connect and Record Logon displays the Recording in Progress window and dials
the phone number (if one exists) or displays a warning and Communications
dialogs to obtain the number. Once HyperACCESS establishes connection with the
remote system,you must manually log on to the system.
HyperACCESS begins learning your keystrokes as soon as you're connected to the
remote system. When you complete all commands you want HyperACCESS to learn,
select Stop! from the menu bar of the Recording in Progress window.
This choice is grayed out (unavailable) if HyperACCESS is already connected to
a remote system.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 6, Automation Tools
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.56. Terminal File - Connect but Skip Logon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Connect but Skip Logon dials the phone number of the remote system. Once
HyperACCESS establishes connection with the remote system, you must manually
log on to the system. This choice is grayed out (unavailable) if HyperACCESS is
already connected to a remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.57. Terminal File - Disconnect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Disconnect is available only if HyperACCESS has made a connection. Otherwise,
this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable). Selecting Disconnect terminates a
communications session by hanging up the phone line (if appropriate) and
releasing the connection.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.58. Terminal File - Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Print... to display the standard print dialog. This dialog enables you
to print selected text in the terminal area or Backscroll Buffer. If you
haven't selected text, HyperACCESS prints the entire terminal or Backscroll
Buffer, whichever is currently active.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.59. Terminal File - Print Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Print Setup... to display a dialog where you can select from among
available printers. HyperACCESS uses the printer you select for all its
printing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.60. Terminal File - Capture to Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Capture to Printer displays a cascade menu with the following choices:
o Start
Displays the Capture to Printer dialog and displays Prn in the status
line while capture is active. This menu choice is grayed out
(unavailable) if printing has already started.
o Stop
Stops printing and closes the printer. The print data are released to the
print spooler.
o Pause
Suspends printing, but doesn't close the printer. If printing is already
paused, this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable).
o Resume
Restarts printing using the current printer. If the printer is already
active, this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.61. Terminal File - Capture to Printer/Start ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Displays the Capture to Printer dialog and displays Prn in the status line
while capture is active. This menu choice is grayed out (unavailable) if
printing has already started.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.62. Terminal File - Capture to Printer/Stop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Stops printing and closes the printer. The print data are released to the print
spooler.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.63. Terminal File - Capture to Printer/Pause ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Suspends printing, but doesn't close the printer. If printing is already
paused, this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.64. Terminal File - Capture to Printer/Resume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Restarts printing using the current printer. If the printer is already active,
this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.65. Terminal File - Capture to File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Capture to File displays a cascade menu with the following choices:
o Start...
Displays the Capture to File dialog and displays Capt in the status line
while capture is active. This menu choice is grayed out (unavailable) if
printing is already started.
o Stop
Stops file capture and closes the current capture file.
o Pause
Suspends file capture, but doesn't close the current capture file. If
capture is already paused, this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable).
o Resume
Restarts file capture using the current capture file. If capture is
already active, this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.66. Terminal File - Capture to File/Start ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Displays the Capture to File dialog and displays Capt in the status line while
capture is active. This menu choice is grayed out (unavailable) if printing is
already started.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.67. Terminal File - Capture to File/Stop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Stops file capture and closes the current capture file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.68. Terminal File - Capture to File/Pause ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Suspends file capture, but doesn't close the current capture file. If capture
is already paused, this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.69. Terminal File - Capture to File/Resume ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Restarts file capture using the current capture file. If capture is already
active, this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.70. Terminal File - Redisplay File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Redisplay File... to display a standard file choice dialog that enables
you to select a file for display. If the file is one that HyperViewer supports,
HyperACCESS launches HyperViewer and displays the file in the HyperViewer
window. Otherwise, HyperACCESS displays the file in the Terminal panel. In this
case, data in the file replaces the current Terminal panel contents. If you are
online, HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog before displaying the file in the
Terminal panel. Data displayed in this manner appears only on your screen and
isn't transmitted to the remote system.
Note: Because you can display any file, HyperACCESS has no way of knowing
whether data will display properly with the current emulator. Displaying
garbage characters may produce strange looking results, but it is harmless.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.71. Terminal File - Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Exit to end the current session of HyperACCESS. If there is an active
connection with a remote system, HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.72. Terminal Panel Edit Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Terminal panel Edit menu provides text manipulation tools. This menu
provides items to copy and paste information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.73. Terminal Edit - Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Copy to copy selected text from the terminal area or Backscroll Buffer
to the Clipboard. Note that you must select text before attempting to use Copy,
which is grayed (unavailable) if you don't select text first. If you prefer,
you can use the Copy shortcut key combination: Ctrl+Insert.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.74. Terminal Edit - Copy to Host ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To copy selected text directly to the remote system, use Copy to Host. This
menu item is available only with text selected.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.75. Terminal Edit - Copy to File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To copy selected text to a file, use Copy to File.... This menu choice displays
the Copy to File dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.76. Terminal Edit - Copy to Printer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Copy to Printer
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.77. Terminal Edit - Copy to Message Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If necessary, this selection opens the Message Pad window, then copies selected
text to the Message Pad.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.78. Terminal Edit - Paste to Host ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Paste to Host copies text from the Clipboard to the host (the remote system).
You can use the shortcut key combination: Shift+Insert.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.79. Terminal Edit - Paste from File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Paste from file... to copy a file to the host (the remote system). This
menu choice displays the Paste from File dialog, where you specify a file to
paste.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.80. Terminal Edit - Select All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Select all to select all text in the terminal area and Backscroll
Buffer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.81. Terminal Edit - Select Terminal Screen ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Select terminal screen to select all text in the terminal area.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.82. Terminal Edit - Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Find... displays the Find dialog, which you can use to find a text string in
either the terminal area or Backscroll Buffer.
The search begins at the current insertion point and proceeds in the direction
specified in the dialog. You can reposition the insertion point while the Find
dialog remains active simply by clicking at the desired location.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.83. Terminal Panel View Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To customize the way HyperACCESS displays its window, use the View menu. There
are several entries in common with the phonebook panel View menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.84. Terminal View - Scroll Lock ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With Scroll Lock selected (checked), the Terminal panel stops scrolling
received text in the terminal area and Backscroll Buffer.
You can use Scroll Lock when you want to force the view to remain stationary
for reading, selecting text, or to making keys available for local uses that
would otherwise perform terminal functions.
When scroll lock is on, HyperACCESS stops scrolling text in the terminal panel
and won't send characters to the remote system. There are two conditions that
cause the panel to be locked. They are:
1. Pressing the Scroll Lock key.
2. Selecting Scroll Lock from the View menu.
Both methods display the Scroll Lock menu choice check mark, cause the Scroll
Lock indicator to light on the keyboard, and display the Scroll Lock indicator
in the status bar (the letters SL appear in the second field of the status
bar). Selecting text in the terminal area or Backscroll Buffer also causes an
implicit scroll lock condition, which ceases as soon as you unselect the text.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.85. Terminal View - Message Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Message Pad to display the Message Pad window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.86. Terminal View - Hide Backscroll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Hide backscroll prevents the Backscroll Buffer from
being displayed unless you explicitly scroll into it. You might want to use
this option if you find the Backscroll Buffer distracting or confusing. The
default is unselected (the Backscroll Buffer is displayed when it has data, and
space is available in the Terminal panel).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.87. Terminal View - Scroll Bars ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Scroll bars suppresses the vertical (and horizontal,
if plural) scroll bars from displaying. The default is unselected.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.88. Terminal View - Button Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Button bar the button bar is displayed below the menu
bar. To remove the button bar from the HyperACCESS window, unselect this menu
item. The selection you make applies to all panels.
The buttons on the Terminal panel are, from left to right: Dial, Disconnect,
Record, Capture to File, Capture to Printer, Print, Settings, Receive, Send,
Message Pad.
To see help text for a button, simply place the mouse pointer over the button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.89. Terminal View - Status Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Status bar displays the status bar at the bottom of
the window. This is the default. Clicking on this menu choice removes the check
mark and status bar. The selection you make applies to all panels.
The status bar has five fields. From left to right, they are:
o Modem LEDs
Simulates the most common front panel indicator lights on external
modems. You can control whether this feature displays by selecting Modem
LEDs from the View menu.
o Connect status
If connected to a port, this field displays the word Connected and the
elapsed time for the current connection in hours, minutes, and seconds.
If HyperACCESS isn't connected to a port, this field displays the word
Disconnected.
o Terminal emulation
Displays the terminal emulator for this session; the Scroll Lock
indicator (SL) when Scroll Lock is on; the Num Lock indicator (NL) when
Num Lock is on; the Caps Lock indicator (CL) when Caps Lock is on; and
the Capture indicator (Capt) when you've selected Capture to file or
(Prn) for Capture to printer. When HyperACCESS is executing a program,
this field displays the program filename.
o Communications settings
Displays the baud rate, number of data bits, parity, and number of stop
bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.90. Terminal View - Modem LEDs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Modem LEDs includes the Modem LED display in the
status bar at the bottom of the window. This feature simulates the most common
front panel indicator lights on external modems. With devices other than
modems, such as direct cable connections, the LEDs indicate equivalent status
information.
The modem LEDs are:
o AA
Auto Answer
o CD
Carrier Detect
o OH
Off Hook
o RD
Receive Data
o SD
Send Data
o TR
Terminal Ready
o MR
Modem Ready
Note: A modem's MR indicator cannot be read by software, so HyperACCESS
infers this state from the modem's DSR (Data Set Ready) signal.
Note: The LED display closely matches actual modem indicators, but it's not
precisely in sync, due to OS/2 communications drivers and buffering.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.91. Terminal View - Panel Tabs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Panel tabs displays the tabs at the bottom of each
panel. When Panel tabs is not selected, you must use the Window menu to change
the current panel. The selection you make applies to all panels.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.92. Terminal Panel Properties Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Terminal panel Properties menu has an entry for each properties sheet. When
you select an entry from this menu, HyperACCESS opens the Properties notebook
with the selected sheet on top. The Properties notebook applies to the Terminal
panel's phonebook entry. HyperACCESS always saves changes you make in the
Properties notebook when you click OK.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.93. Terminal Properties - Description ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Description... to display the Description properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.94. Terminal Properties - Communications ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Communications... to display the Communications properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.95. Terminal Properties - Terminal Emulator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Terminal emulator... to display the Terminal Emulator properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.96. Terminal Properties - ASCII Receiving ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select ASCII receiving... to display the ASCII Receiving properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.97. Terminal Properties - ASCII Sending ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select ASCII sending... to display the ASCII Sending properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.98. Terminal Properties - File Transfer ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select File transfer... to display the File Transfer properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.99. Terminal Properties - File Usage ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select File usage... to display the File Usage properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.100. Terminal Properties - Preferences ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Preferences... to display the Preferences properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.101. Terminal Properties - Runtime Values ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Runtime values... to display the Runtime Values properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.102. Terminal Properties - Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Selecting Fonts... displays the Fonts properties sheet
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.103. Terminal Properties - Colors ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Colors... to display the Colors properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.104. Terminal Panel Transfer Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can use the Terminal panel Transfer menu choices to send (upload) and
receive (download) files.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.105. Terminal Transfer - Receive ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Receive (download)... to display a modeless dialog that you can position
anywhere on your screen. The dialog enables you to set the file transfer
protocol and other parameters for receiving files from a remote system. You can
continue to interact with the remote system with this dialog displayed: prepare
to receive files, issue commands to the remote system, then click the Receive
button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.106. Terminal Transfer - Send ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Send (upload)... to display a modeless dialog that you can position
anywhere on your screen. The dialog enables you to set the file transfer
protocol and other parameters for sending files to a remote system. You can
continue to interact with the remote system with this dialog displayed: prepare
to send files, issue commands to the remote system, then click the Send button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.107. Terminal Panel Automation Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Terminal panel Automation menu contains some of the same choices as its
phonebook panel counterpart, plus additional selections related to
HyperACCESS's powerful recording capabilities.
HyperACCESS can actually record your interaction with remote systems and
generate REXX programs to automate your communications. The generated REXX
programs use the HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface (HAPI)
functions. For more about HAPI, and the definition of the functions available,
see the HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface Manual. That manual also
provides programming examples for both simple and complex tasks.
Note: Depending on the product you purchase, the HyperACCESS Application
Programming Interface Manual might be only on disk.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.108. Terminal Automation - Run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Run... to display a standard file browse dialog, where you can select a
drive, directory, and file to run a program. The file you select can be an
automatically generated REXX program, or any .EXE program that uses the
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface (HAPI).
Related Information
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface Manual
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.109. Terminal Automation - Abort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Abort to terminate the automatic program being run. This choice is
dimmed or grayed out (unavailable) unless a program is executing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.110. Terminal Automation - Record ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Record to start automatic generation of a REXX program. HyperACCESS
displays (Recording) in the title bar and opens a window for recording
generated statements. The title bar of this window is Recording in Progress,
and it includes initialization statements as soon as you begin recording.
Your keystrokes and interaction with the remote system generate additional
statements in the Recording in Progress window. You can edit statements as they
appear, or you can wait to customize the generated program after you've stopped
recording.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 6, Automation Tools
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.111. Terminal Automation - Recording Options ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Recording options to display a dialog where you can select between two
options for ending a program during playback:
o Only if you abort it manually
o If the remote system fails to respond within a time you specify
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.112. Terminal Automation - Runtime Values ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Runtime Values... to specify variable data that your automation programs
(scripts) can use. You can set or review the Runtime Values from the Automation
menu or Properties notebook.
You can enter values for User Name, User ID, Password, and String #0 through
String #20. To make use of these values, an automation program must include
statements that retrieve the values. While recording programs, you can insert
User Name, User ID, or Password statements by using the Action menu in the
Recording in Progress window. You can also include such statements when writing
automation programs, plus use statements that retrieve and use String #0
through String #20.
If you want to obscure the Password entry for security purposes, click the Hide
button. The button label changes to Show..., and the password appears as
asterisks. You can change the password, even while it is hidden; the new
password also appears as asterisks. To "unhide" the password, click the Show...
button, and enter the present password, to prove you are authorized to make it
visible.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 6, Automation Tools
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.113. Terminal Automation - Edit Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Edit program... to display a standard file browse dialog where you can
select a drive, directory, and file that contains the source program you want
to edit. When selected, the file is opened in OS/2's System (or Enhanced)
Editor, or whichever editor (text viewer) you've specified in the External
Utilities dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.114. Terminal Automation - Keys ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Keys... from the Automation menu to display a dialog that you can use to
assign macros, commands, or programs to key combinations.
The ability to define macros provides a powerful technique within HyperACCESS
to remap your keyboard. In addition to simple keyboard remapping, macros enable
you to assign multiple keystrokes to a single key or key combination. This
provides a simple, straightforward, nonprogramming method to automate commonly
used words, phrases, and key combinations.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.115. Terminal Automation - Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Buttons... to display a dialog where you can define or modify
system-defined buttons that appear in the button bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.116. Terminal Panel Window Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The first four choices in the Window menu (Clear backscroll, Clear terminal,
Reset terminal, Show clipboard) are unique for the Terminal panel. The
remaining choices (Terminal, Main Phonebook, Host Mode, Call Log, Lists) are
the HyperACCESS panels. You can use this menu to make another panel active when
the panel tabs are not displayed. The currently active panel appears in this
menu with a check mark.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.117. Terminal Window - Clear Backscroll ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Clear backscroll to erase the contents of the Backscroll Buffer in the
Terminal panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.118. Terminal Window - Clear Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Clear terminal to erase the contents of the terminal area of the
Terminal panel. HyperACCESS scrolls lines in the terminal area up into the
Backscroll Buffer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.119. Terminal Window - Reset Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Reset terminal to return the terminal emulator to its default settings.
The defaults depend on the terminal type and might include settings such as tab
stops, cursor type, colors, and so on.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.120. Terminal Window - Show Clipboard ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Show clipboard to have HyperACCESS load the Clipboard application. You
can resize or move the Clipboard anywhere on your screen while you continue
working in HyperACCESS. You can use the Clipboard for cut-and-paste operations
during a communications session.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.121. Terminal Window - Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Terminal to display the Terminal panel where you interact with the
remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.122. Terminal Window - Main Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Main Phonebook to display the phonebook panel containing the default
phonebook. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.123. Terminal Window - Host Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Host Mode to display the phonebook panel containing host mode phonebook
entries. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.124. Terminal Window - Other Phonebooks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Any additional phonebooks that you create appear in this menu. The name that
appears in the list is the same name that appears on the panel tab.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.125. Terminal Window - Call Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Call Log to display the Call Log panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.126. Terminal Window - Lists ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Lists to display the Lists panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.127. Message Pad Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Each menu on the Message Pad's menu bar gives you some control over the window
and how it's used or displayed. Briefly, the menus are:
o File
Use to open, save, and print any text file. You can also close the
Message Pad window. HyperACCESS always saves the Message Pad contents
when you close the window. The next time you display the Message Pad,
HyperACCESS displays its previous contents.
o Edit
Use to cut, copy, paste, and delete the contents of the Message Pad
window. It also provides menu choices for undoing the last edit
operation, finding a string, and selecting the entire window contents.
o View
Use to display or hide the button bar.
o Options
Use to enable chat mode and word wrap.
o Automation
Use to run predefined programs and macros, and set up custom buttons.
o Send!
Transmits the contents of Message Pad to the remote system. If necessary,
HyperACCESS initiates a connection to the remote system before sending
the Message Pad contents.
o Help
Provides additional information on how to use HyperACCESS.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.128. Message Pad File Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Message Pad File menu enables you to open, save, and print any text file.
You can also close the Message Pad window. HyperACCESS always saves the Message
Pad contents when you close the window or exit the program. The next time you
display the Message Pad, HyperACCESS displays its previous contents.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.129. Message Pad File - Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Open... to display a standard file browse dialog. Use this dialog to
select and open any text file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.130. Message Pad File - Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Save as... to display a standard Save As dialog. Use this dialog to
specify a new filename and path to save the contents of the Message Pad window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.131. Message Pad File - Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Print... to display a standard Print dialog. Use this dialog to print
the current contents of the Message Pad window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.132. Message Pad File - Print Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Print setup... to display a dialog where you select from among
system-defined printers. HyperACCESS uses the printer you select for all its
printing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.133. Message Pad File - Close ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Close to close the Message Pad window and save its contents. Each
phonebook entry has its own saved copy of the Message Pad contents at the time
Message Pad was last used for that phonebook entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.134. Message Pad Edit Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You'll find the Message Pad Edit menu items useful for copying, cutting,
removing, and finding text in the window (actually any ASCII text file).
Briefly, the Edit menu choices are:
o Undo
The Undo menu choice is available after a cut, delete, or paste
operation. It reverses the most recent operation. If you prefer, you can
use the Undo shortcut key sequence: Alt+Backspace.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.135. Message Pad Edit - Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Undo menu choice is available after a cut, or a delete operation. It
reverses the most recent operation. If you prefer, you can use the Undo
shortcut key sequence: Alt+Backspace.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.136. Message Pad Edit - Cut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Cut to remove selected text from the Message Pad and copy it to the
Clipboard. If you prefer, you can use the Cut shortcut key sequence:
Shift+Delete or the Cut button on the button bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.137. Message Pad Edit - Cut to Host ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Cut to Host to remove selected text from the Message Pad and copy it to
the remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.138. Message Pad Edit - Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Copy to copy selected text from the Message Pad to the Clipboard. If you
prefer, you can use the Copy shortcut key sequence: Ctrl+Insert.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.139. Message Pad Edit - Copy to ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Copy to menu choice displays a cascade menu with three entries:
o Host
Copies selected text from the Message Pad to the remote system.
o File...
Displays the Copy to File dialog. Use this dialog to specify a file to
use as the destination for copying selected text from the Message Pad.
o Print
Copies selected text from the Message Pad to the printer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.140. Message Pad Edit - Copy to/Host ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Copies selected text from the Message Pad to the remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.141. Message Pad Edit - Copy to/File... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Displays the Copy to File dialog. Use this dialog to specify a file to use as
the destination for copying selected text from the Message Pad.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.142. Message Pad Edit - Copy to/Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Copies selected text from the Message Pad to the printer.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.143. Message Pad Edit - Paste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Paste to copy text from the Clipboard to the cursor position in the
Message Pad. You can use the shortcut key Shift+Insert.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.144. Message Pad Edit - Paste from File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Paste from File... to display the Paste from File dialog. Use this
dialog to copy text from the Clipboard to the cursor position in the Message
Pad.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.145. Message Pad Edit - Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Clear to remove selected text from the Message Pad window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.146. Message Pad Edit - Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Find... to locate a text string in the window. You specify the search
string and criteria in the Find dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.147. Message Pad Edit - Select All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Select all to select all text in the Message Pad window. If you prefer,
you can use the shortcut key sequence: Ctrl+/
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.148. Message Pad View Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This menu has only one menu choice: Button bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.149. Message Pad View - Button Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Button bar displays the button bar below the menu bar
in the Message Pad window. The buttons are: Cut, Copy, Paste, Print, Send. To
remove the button bar, unselect this menu choice.
To see help text for a button, simply place the mouse pointer over the button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.150. Message Pad Options Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Options menu has two choices that control how the Message Pad behaves.
These choices enable and configure chat mode and word wrap.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.151. Message Pad Options - Chat Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The term chat mode means an interactive session with a remote system. It
usually implies that another person is on the other end of the interaction, and
that you want to carry on a "conversation" with that person.
When selected (checked), the Chat mode menu choice enables chat mode. When chat
mode is enabled, HyperACCESS sends the current Message Pad contents whenever
you press the Enter key. After sending the Message Pad contents in chat mode,
HyperACCESS clears the Message Pad window in preparation for your next message.
To disable chat mode, unselect this menu choice.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.152. Message Pad Options - Word Wrap ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Word wrap occurs when a text editor or word processor breaks a line at the end
of a word or at punctuation. The term word wrap usually implies that whole
words move to the next line without hyphenation. HyperACCESS supports word wrap
in the Message Pad window for readability and because some host systems have
relatively short maximum line lengths (for example, MCI Mail has a maximum line
length of 79 characters).
When selected, Word wrap... displays the Word Wrap dialog. Use this dialog to
select either automatic or manual line formatting. With automatic formatting
selected, you can set the maximum line width using the edit field or its
associated spin button. When you send text to the host from the Message Pad,
HyperACCESS sends all visible line endings, whether typed manually by pressing
Enter or inserted by automatic formatting.
If you select manual formatting, HyperACCESS sends only line endings typed
manually. If you leave the Wrap to fit Message Pad check box selected (the
default), HyperACCESS word wraps lines too wide to fit the Message Pad window,
but doesn't send corresponding line endings. If you unselect this check box,
you will need to use the horizontal scroll bar to view lines wider than the
Message Pad window.
The Message Pad follows settings in the ASCII Sending properties sheet when
sending text. If you need to change settings for line endings, wait for
specific prompt characters, add delays, and so on, use the ASCII Sending
properties sheet. (You can select ASCII sending... from the Terminal panel
Properties menu.)
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.153. Message Pad Send! Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Send! performs an immediate action, because it doesn't have any menu choices.
Send! transmits the contents of Message Pad to the remote system. If necessary,
HyperACCESS initiates a connection to the remote system before sending the
Message Pad contents.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.154. Message Pad Automation Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Message Pad Automation menu has the same items as its phonebook panel
counterpart: Run, Abort, Edit program, Buttons. Use this menu to automate
HyperACCESS operations in the Message Pad.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.155. Message Pad Automation - Run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Run... to display a standard file browse dialog, where you can select a
drive, directory, and file to run a program. The file you select can be an
automatically generated REXX program, or any .EXE program that uses the
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface (HAPI).
Related Information
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface Manual
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.156. Message Pad Automation - Abort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Abort to terminate the automatic program being run. This choice is
dimmed or grayed out (unavailable) unless a program is executing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.157. Message Pad Automation - Edit Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Edit Program... to display a standard file browse dialog where you can
select a drive, directory, and file that contains the source program you want
to edit. When selected, the file is opened in OS/2's System (or Enhanced)
Editor, or whichever editor (text viewer) you've specified in the External
Utilities dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.158. Message Pad Automation - Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Buttons... to display a dialog where you can define or modify
system-defined buttons that appear in the button bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.159. Host Mode Panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Host Mode panel is simply another phonebook that HyperACCESS provides in
addition to the Main Phonebook. When installed, the Host Mode phonebook
includes HyperACCESS Host and the New Phonebook Entry Template. In all other
respects, this panel is like any other phonebook panel.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 7, HyperACCESS Host Mode
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.160. Host Mode File Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Host Mode panel File menu for adding and deleting phonebook entries,
beginning a communications session, and exiting HyperACCESS.
The Host Mode File menu is the same as the Main Phonebook File menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.161. New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Regardless of the phonebook entry selected, New... displays the Description
dialog, where you enter a phonebook entry name, select or add an icon, and
specify a phonebook and terminal emulator. HyperACCESS then displays the
Communications dialog, where you can change any of the default settings. This
new entry uses settings from the Phonebook entry New Phonebook Entry Template.
When you have finished entering information in the Communications dialog, click
OK to close the dialog and return to the displayed Terminal panel. Cancel
closes the dialog without canceling the new phonebook entry.
Opening a new phonebook entry or exiting HyperACCESS automatically saves your
new phonebook entry. HyperACCESS creates a filename based on the phonebook
entry name you entered in the Description dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.162. Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Open... displays the Terminal panel with the name of the selected phonebook
entry in the title bar and sets communications parameters to those of the
entry. It does not connect to the communications port or dial the phone number.
Note: You can open the New Phonebook Entry Template and modify default settings
from the Terminal panel. However, you can't connect to a remote system or type
in the Terminal panel when the New Phonebook Entry Template is open
(HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog if you attempt either of these actions).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.163. File Menu - Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Save as... from the File menu to save the selected phonebook entry with
a new name that you specify. It displays the Description dialog. When you enter
a phonebook entry name, select an icon, and click OK, HyperACCESS creates a
phonebook entry filename with an HAO extension, and displays the standard Save
As dialog. This dialog enables you to change the filename, drive, and directory
to use for the save.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.164. File - Import... ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Import... to import phonebook entry files that don't currently appear in
the phonebook. This menu choice displays the Import File browse dialog where
you can select a drive, directory, and file. Unlike other browse dialogs,
Import File enables you to make multiple selections from the file list. Once
you select one or more phonebook entry files, HyperACCESS displays the entry in
the current phonebook.
Note: You can also perform an import by dragging a phonebook entry file
(usually with an HAO extension) from an OS/2 drive folder onto the phonebook
panel on which you want it to appear.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.165. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Delete... removes an entry from the phonebook. This menu choice displays a
warning dialog with the following choices:
o Remove from Phonebook
Removes the entry from the phonebook, but doesn't delete its file from
the disk.
o Delete from Disk
Removes the entry from the phonebook and deletes its file from the disk.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.166. Connect ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Connect opens the Terminal panel, makes a connection, and dials the phone
number (if appropriate).
You can specify the amount of time to wait for a carrier signal, number of and
time between retries, and the volume of your modem speaker in the Dialing
Details dialog. You access this dialog when applicable for the connection
device (for example, a modem) by clicking the Dialing Details... button in the
Communications properties sheet.
When you select a phonebook entry that doesn't have a phone number for
connection devices that require one, HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog that
tells you to enter a phone number and displays the Communications dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.167. Connect and Record Logon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Connect and Record Logon records a logon sequence to use for future
connections. This menu choice displays the Terminal panel and the Recording in
Progress window, and dials the phone number (if one exists) or displays a
warning and Communications dialogs to obtain the number. Once HyperACCESS
establishes connection with the remote system, you must manually log on to the
system.
HyperACCESS begins learning your keystrokes as soon as you're connected to the
remote system. When you complete all commands you want HyperACCESS to learn,
select Stop! from the menu bar of the Recording in Progress window.
Related Information
For more information, see HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 6, Automation
Tools.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.168. Connect But Skip Logon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Connect but Skip Logon ignores a standard logon script that was previously
recorded. It displays the Terminal panel and dials the phone number (if one
exists) or displays a warning and the Communications dialogs to obtain the
number. Once HyperACCESS establishes connection with the remote system, you
must manually log on to the system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.169. Properties ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Properties to specify various settings for HyperACCESS. This menu choice
displays a cascade menu of properties sheets. Among parameters you specify
through Properties sheets are names and icons for phonebook entries;
communications settings such as connection and phone number; terminal emulator
and custom settings for the emulator; ASCII receiving and sending parameters;
file transfer protocols; paths used for logon program, capture file, and log
file; and default preferences for mouse behavior, fonts, colors and other
settings.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.170. File - Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Exit to end the current session of HyperACCESS. If there is an active
connection with a remote system, HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.171. Phonebook Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the Phonebook menu to create or delete phonebooks. You can also copy a
phonebook or rename it.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.172. Phonebook Name ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Phonebook Name... to display the Phonebook Name dialog, where you can
change the name of the current phonebook. The phonebook tab permits names up to
32 characters long.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.173. Phonebook - New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
New... displays the Phonebook Name dialog, where you can specify the name of a
new phonebook. When you enter a new name and click OK, HyperACCESS displays a
blank phonebook panel with a tab that shows the new name. The phonebook tab
permits names up to 32 characters long. The only phonebook entry in your new
phonebook is the New Phonebook Entry Template.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.174. Phonebook - Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Copy to copy in one action all phonebook entries from the current
phonebook to another phonebook. It displays the Phonebook Name dialog so you
can specify the name of the destination phonebook. If the destination phonebook
doesn't exist, HyperACCESS creates it, and the phonebook tab shows the new
name. You can't copy to an existing phonebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.175. Phonebook - Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Delete removes the phonebook panel. This menu choide displays a confirmation
dialog. When you click OK, HyperACCESS deletes the phonebook panel. This
selection doesn't delete the files of the phonebook entries contained in the
deleted phonebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.176. Host Mode View Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Host Mode View menu includes choices for customizing the way HyperACCESS
displays the current phonebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.177. Host Mode View - Refresh Now ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Refresh now to redisplay all current communications sessions.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.178. Host Mode View - Icons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When Icons is selected (the default), this menu choice displays a check mark,
and you'll see a phonebook panel with icons representing the phonebook entries.
Each icon and associated phonebook entry name identifies a remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.179. Host Mode View - Details ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With Details selected (checked), you'll see columns of text instead of an
icon-based panel. The details displayed are values specified in the
Communications properties sheet, plus the logon program file from the File
Usage properties sheet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.180. Host Mode View - Entry Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With Entry Names selected (checked), each phonebook entry in your phonebook is
displayed in a multi-column list format with only the phonebook entry name
shown.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.181. Host Mode View - File Names ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With File names selected (checked), the phonebook displays each entry with its
icon and full path including drive, directory, and filename.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.182. Host Mode View - Button Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With Button Bar selected (checked), the button bar appears below the menu bar.
The Host Mode buttons are New, Open, Dial, Record, Settings, View. To remove
the button bar, unselect this menu choice. The selection you make (whether to
display the Button Bar or not) applies to all panels, although the buttons
displayed are different from panel to panel.
To see help text for a button, simply place the mouse pointer over the button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.183. Host Mode View - Status Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Status Bar displays the status bar at the bottom of
the window. This is the default. Clicking on this selected menu choice removes
the check mark and status bar. The selection you make applies to all panels.
The status bar has five fields. From left to right, they are:
o Modem LEDs
Simulates the most common front panel indicator lights on external
modems. You can control whether this feature displays by selecting Modem
LEDs from the View menu.
o Connect status
If connected to a port, this field displays the word Connected and the
elapsed time for the current connection in hours, minutes, and seconds.
If HyperACCESS isn't connected to a port, this field displays the word
Disconnected.
o Terminal emulation
Displays the terminal emulator for this session; the Scroll Lock
indicator (SL) when Scroll Lock is on; the Num Lock indicator (NL) when
Num Lock is on; the Caps Lock indicator (CL) when Caps Lock is on; and
the Capture indicator (Capt) when you've selected Capture to file or
(Prn) for Capture to printer. When HyperACCESS is executing a program,
this field displays the program filename.
o Communications settings
Displays the baud rate, number of data bits, parity, and number of stop
bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.184. Host Mode View - Modem LEDs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Modem LEDs includes the Modem LED display in the
status bar at the bottom of the window. The selection you make applies to all
panels.
This feature simulates the most common front panel indicator lights on external
modems. With devices other than modems, such as direct cable connections, the
LEDs indicate equivalent status information.
The modem LEDs are:
o AA
Auto Answer
o CD
Carrier Detect
o OH
Off Hook
o RD
Receive Data
o SD
Send Data
o TR
Terminal Ready
o MR
Modem Ready
Note: A modem's MR indicator cannot be read by software, so HyperACCESS
infers this state from the modem's DSR (Data Set Ready) signal.
Note: The LED display closely matches actual modem indicators, but it's not
precisely in sync, due to OS/2 communications drivers and buffering.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.185. Host Mode View - Panel Tabs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Panel tabs displays the tabs at the bottom of each
panel. When Panel tabs is not selected, you must use the Window menu to change
the current panel. The selection you make applies to all panels.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.186. Host Mode Options Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Host Mode Options menu enables you to specify external utilities and sounds
that you want HyperACCESS to use.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.187. Host Mode Options - External Utilities ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select External Utilities to change the text viewer and clipboard viewer
programs used by HyperACCESS. By default, HyperACCESS uses the OS/2 Enhanced
Editor and Clipboard.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.188. Host Mode Options - Sound ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Sound... to display the Sound dialog. You can specify whether you want
HyperACCESS to use multimedia sound, system beeps, or silent operation.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.189. Host Mode Automation Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Automation menu provides four choices for automating HyperACCESS operation:
Run, Abort, Edit Program, Buttons. These choices are a subset of the Terminal
panel Automation menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.190. Host Mode Automation - Run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Run... to display a standard file browse dialog, where you can select a
drive, directory, and file to run a program. The file you select can be an
automatically generated REXX program, or any .EXE program that uses the
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface (HAPI).
Related Information
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface Manual
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.191. Host Mode Automation - Abort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Abort to terminate the automatic program being run. This choice is
dimmed or grayed out (unavailable) unless a program is executing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.192. Host Mode Automation - Edit Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Edit Program... to display a standard file browse dialog where you can
select a drive, directory, and file that contains the source program you want
to edit. When selected, the file is opened in OS/2's System (or Enhanced)
Editor, or whichever editor (text viewer) you've specified in the External
Utilities dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.193. Host Mode Automation - Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Buttons... to display a dialog where you can define or modify
system-defined buttons that appear in the button bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.194. Host Mode Window Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Host Mode panel provides a Window menu that enables you to select another
HyperACCESS panel for display: Terminal, Main Phonebook, Host Mode, Call Log,
Lists. You can use this menu to make another panel active when the panel tabs
are not displayed. The currently active panel appears with a check mark.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.195. Host Mode Window - Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Terminal to display the Terminal panel where you interact with the
remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.196. Host Mode Window - Main Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Main Phonebook to display the phonebook panel containing the default
phonebook. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.197. Host Mode Window - Host Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Host Mode to display the phonebook panel containing host mode phonebook
entries. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.198. Host Mode Window - Other Phonebooks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Any additional phonebooks that you create appear in this menu. The name that
appears in the list is the same name that appears on the panel tab.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.199. Host Mode Window - Call Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Call Log to display the Call Log panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.200. Host Mode Window - Lists ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Lists to display the Lists panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.201. Lists Panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Lists panel provides a tool for viewing lists of remote systems.
HyperACCESS comes with several lists. In addition, you can download other lists
from various bulletin board systems, or export lists from contact programs and
personal information managers (PIMs). These lists give you the option of
calling thousands of systems, yet the space required to store the information
is minimal compared to regular phonebook entries.
To use a list file, it must have a template. The list files that come with
HyperACCESS have predefined templates. You can create templates for list files
you download or create.
Each menu on the menu bar provides control over the Lists panel and how it's
used or displayed. Briefly, the menus are:
o File
Open or save a list file, copy entries to a phonebook, or place a trial
call. You can also find menu items to create a list template, print a
list, and exit HyperACCESS.
o Edit
Cut or copy selected text to the clipboard. It also features a search
capability with the Find... menu choice.
o View
Customize various features of the Lists panel.
o Automation
Run programs and set up custom buttons.
o Window
Change the display of windows within HyperACCESS.
o Help
Provides additional information on how to use HyperACCESS.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.202. Lists Panel File Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The File menu choices enable you to open, save, and print lists. You can also
find choices for copying entries to a phonebook, placing a trial call, and
creating a list file template.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.203. Lists Panel File - Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Open... to display a standard file browse dialog box that enables you to
select and open a list file (actually any ASCII file).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.204. Lists Panel File - Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Save to write the contents of the current Lists panel to the current
list file. This selection doesn't prompt you for a filename because it saves to
the same file that is open.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.205. Lists Panel File - Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Save as... to display a standard Save As dialog that enables you to
specify a new filename and path to save the contents of the Lists panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.206. Lists Panel File - Copy to Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With one entry selected in the Lists panel, this menu choice displays the
sequence of dialogs required to define a new phonebook entry. With multiple
entries selected in the Lists panel, this menu choice displays a dialog where
you select a phonebook that you want to use as the destination for a copy of
selected entries. Entries appear in the phonebook with a default icon and the
entry name specified in the list. The list in this dialog displays defined
phonebooks. You can select any phonebook from the list.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.207. Lists Panel File - Place Trial Call ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select the Place Trial Call menu choice to call an entry in the Lists panel
before copying the entry to a phonebook. If you have more than one entry
selected, this menu choice is grayed out (unavailable).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.208. Lists Panel File - Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Template... from the Lists panel File menu to display the Template
dialog. It enables you to define a template for the current list file.
HyperACCESS requires a template for every list file so that it can interpret
the data in the file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.209. Lists Panel File - Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Print... to display a standard Print dialog so you can print the current
list file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.210. Lists Panel File - Print Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Print Setup... displays a dialog that enables you to select from among
system-defined printers. HyperACCESS uses the printer you select for all its
printing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.211. Lists Panel File - Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Exit menu choice terminates HyperACCESS. If there is an active connection
with a remote system, HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog. HyperACCESS
automatically saves any changes that you make to the list file. The next time
you display the Lists panel, HyperACCESS displays the file that was last open.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.212. Lists Panel Edit Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You'll find the Lists panel Edit menu choices useful for copying, cutting,
removing, and finding entries in a list file (actually any ASCII text file).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.213. Lists Panel Edit - Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Undo menu choice is available after a cut or a delete operation. It
reverses the most recent operation. If you prefer, you can use the Undo
shortcut key sequence: Alt+Backspace.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.214. Lists Panel Edit - Cut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Cut to remove selected entries from the Lists panel and copy them to the
Clipboard. If you prefer, you can use the Cut shortcut key sequence:
Shift+Delete.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.215. Lists Panel Edit - Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Copy to copy selected text from the Lists panel to the Clipboard. If you
prefer, you can use the Copy shortcut key sequence: Ctrl+Insert.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.216. Lists Panel Edit - Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Clear to remove selected entries from the list. If you prefer, you can
use the Clear shortcut key: Delete.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.217. Lists Panel Edit - Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Find... to locates a text string in the list. You specify the search
string and criteria in the Find dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.218. Lists Panel View Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To customize the way HyperACCESS displays, you can use the View menu. The
choices are: Button bar, Status bar, Modem LEDs, Panel tabs.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.219. Lists Panel View - Button Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Button bar displays the button bar below the menu bar.
Use the buttons to copy a list to a phonebook, place a trial call, cut a list
entry, and print a list. To remove the button bar, unselect this menu choice.
The selection you make applies to all panels.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.220. Lists Panel View - Status Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Status bar displays the status bar at the bottom of
the window. This is the default. Clicking on this menu choice removes the check
mark and status bar. The selection you make applies to all panels.
The status bar has five fields. From left to right, they are:
o Modem LEDs
Simulates the most common front panel indicator lights on external
modems. You can control whether this feature displays by selecting Modem
LEDs from the View menu.
o Connect status
If connected to a port, this field displays the word Connected and the
elapsed time for the current connection in hours, minutes, and seconds.
If HyperACCESS isn't connected to a port, this field displays the word
Disconnected.
o Terminal emulation
Displays the terminal emulator for this session; the Scroll Lock
indicator (SL) when Scroll Lock is on; the Num Lock indicator (NL) when
Num Lock is on; the Caps Lock indicator (CL) when Caps Lock is on; and
the Capture indicator (Capt) when you've selected Capture to file or
(Prn) for Capture to printer. When HyperACCESS is executing a program,
this field displays the program filename.
o Communications settings
Displays the baud rate, number of data bits, parity, and number of stop
bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.221. Lists Panel View - Modem LEDs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Modem LEDs includes the Modem LED display in the
status bar at the bottom of the window. The selection you make applies to all
panels.
This feature simulates the most common front panel indicator lights on external
modems. With devices other than modems, such as direct cable connections, the
LEDs indicate equivalent status information.
The modem LEDs are:
o AA
Auto Answer
o CD
Carrier Detect
o OH
Off Hook
o RD
Receive Data
o SD
Send Data
o TR
Terminal Ready
o MR
Modem Ready
Note: A modem's MR indicator cannot be read by software, so HyperACCESS
infers this state from the modem's DSR (Data Set Ready) signal.
Note: The LED display closely matches actual modem indicators, but it's not
precisely in sync, due to OS/2 communications drivers and buffering.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.222. Lists Panel View - Panel Tabs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Panel tabs displays the tabs at the bottom of each
panel. When unselected, the only way to change the current panel is to use the
Window menu. The selection you make applies to all panels.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.223. Lists Panel Automation Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can use the Lists panel Automation menu to run and edit programs that will
operate HyperACCESS.
The Automation menu provides four choices for automating HyperACCESS operation:
Run, Abort, Edit Program, Buttons. These choices are a subset of the Terminal
panel Automation menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.224. Lists Panel Automation - Run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Run... to display a standard file browse dialog, where you can select a
drive, directory, and file to run a program. The file you select can be an
automatically generated REXX program, or any .EXE program that uses the
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface (HAPI).
Related Information
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface Manual
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.225. Lists Panel Automation - Abort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Abort to terminate the automatic program being run. This choice is
dimmed or grayed out (unavailable) unless a program is executing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.226. Lists Panel Automation - Edit Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Edit Program... to display a standard file browse dialog where you can
select a drive, directory, and file that contains the source program you want
to edit. When selected, the file is opened in OS/2's System (or Enhanced)
Editor, or whichever editor (text viewer) you've specified in the External
Utilities dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.227. Lists Panel Automation - Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Buttons... to display a dialog where you can define or modify
system-defined buttons that appear in the button bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.228. Lists Panel Window Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Window menu enables you to select another HyperACCESS panel for display:
Terminal, Main Phonebook, Host Mode, Call Log, Lists. You can use this menu to
make another panel active when the panel tabs are not displayed. The currently
active panel appears with a check mark.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.229. Lists Window - Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Terminal to display the Terminal panel where you interact with the
remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.230. Lists Window - Main Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Main Phonebook to display the phonebook panel containing the default
phonebook. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.231. Lists Window - Host Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Host Mode to display the phonebook panel containing host mode phonebook
entries. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.232. Lists Window - Other Phonebooks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Any additional phonebooks that you create appear in this menu. The name that
appears in the list is the same name that appears on the panel tab.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.233. Lists Window - Call Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Call Log to display the Call Log panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.234. Lists Window - Lists ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Lists to display the Lists panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.235. Call Log Panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Call Log panel enables you to view and edit log files. A log file is an
ASCII file that contains a record of calls and file transfers. By default,
HyperACCESS uses the same log file, DEFAULT.LOG, for all phonebook entries. You
can specify a unique log file for any or all phonebook entries.
When you select its tab, the Call Log panel displays the current call log. You
can open any ASCII file in this panel. HyperACCESS keeps this file in the panel
until you explicitly open another file, or load another phonebook entry and
then display the Call Log panel again.
Note: Although the Call Log panel can load any ASCII file, it has a limited
size. When the Call Log panel attempts to load a file that exceeds 32K bytes,
it requests confirmation to delete the oldest information in the file (assuming
log file content). If you get this message for other types of files, make sure
you select Cancel.
Each menu on the Call Log menu bar provides control over the Call Log panel and
how it's used or displayed. Briefly, the menus are:
o File provides selections that enable you to clear or save the call log
(or any ASCII) file. You can also find menu items to print the file, and
exit HyperACCESS.
o Edit enables you tocut or copy selected text to the clipboard. It also
features a search capability with the Find... menu item.
o View enables you tocustomize various features of the Call Log panel.
o Automation enables you torun programs and set up custom keys and buttons.
o Window enables you to change the display of windows within HyperACCESS.
o Help provides additional information on how to use HyperACCESS.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.236. Call Log Panel File Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The File menu items enable you to open, save, and print the Call Log panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.237. Call Log Panel File - Open ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Open... to display a standard file browse dialog box that enables you to
select and open a log file (actually any ASCII file).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.238. Call Log Panel File - Save ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Save to write the contents of the current Call Log panel to the current
log file. This selection doesn't prompt you for a filename because it saves to
the same file that is open.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.239. Call Log Panel File - Save As ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Save As... to display a standard Save As dialog that enables you to
specify a new filename and path to save the contents of the Call Log panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.240. Call Log Panel File - Print ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Print... to display a standard Print dialog to print the current list
file.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.241. Call Log Panel File - Print Setup ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Print Setup... to display a dialog that enables you to select from
among system-defined printers. HyperACCESS uses the printer you select for all
its printing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.242. Call Log Panel File - Exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Exit menu choice to terminate HyperACCESS. If there is an active
connection with a remote system, HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog.
HyperACCESS automatically saves any changes that you make to the log file. The
next time you display the Call Log panel, HyperACCESS displays the file that
was last open, or, if you loaded a different phonebook entry, HyperACCESS
displays the log specified for that entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.243. Call Log Panel Edit Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You'll find the Call Log panel Edit menu choices useful for text manipulation.
The choices are: Undo, Cut, Copy, Paste, Clear, Find..., Select All.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.244. Call Log Panel Edit - Undo ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Undo menu choice is available after a cut, delete, or paste operation. It
reverses the last operation. If you prefer, you can use the Undo shortcut key
sequence: Alt+Backspace.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.245. Call Log Panel Edit - Cut ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Cut to remove selected entries from the Call Log panel and copy them to
the Clipboard. If you prefer, you can use the Cut shortcut key sequence:
Shift+Delete.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.246. Call Log Panel Edit - Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Copy to copy selected text from the Call Log panel to the Clipboard. If
you prefer, you can use the Copy shortcut key sequence: Ctrl+Insert.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.247. Call Log Panel Edit - Paste ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Paste to copy selected text from the Clipboard to the Call Log panel. If
you prefer, you can use the Paste shortcut key sequence: Shift+Insert.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.248. Call Log Panel Edit - Clear ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Clear to remove selected entries from the Call Log panel. If you prefer,
you can use the Clear shortcut key: Delete.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.249. Call Log Panel Edit - Find ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Find... to locate a text string in the list. You specify the search
string and criteria in the Find dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.250. Call Log Panel Edit - Select All ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Select All menu choice selects (highlights) the entire contents of the Call
Log panel. If you prefer, you can use the Select All shortcut key: Ctrl+/.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.251. Call Log Panel View Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can use the Call Log panel View menu to change the appearance of the
HyperACCESS window. It has the same items as its Lists panel counterpart: The
choices are: Button bar, Status bar, Modem LEDs, Panel tabs.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.252. Call Log Panel View - Button Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Button bar displays the button bar below the menu bar.
Use the buttons to copy a list to a phonebook, place a trial call, cut a list
entry, and print a list. To remove the button bar, unselect this menu choice.
The selection you make applies to all panels.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.253. Call Log Panel View - Status Bar ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Status bar displays the status bar at the bottom of
the window. This is the default. Clicking on this menu choice removes the check
mark and status bar. The selection you make applies to all panels.
The status bar has five fields. From left to right, they are:
o Modem LEDs
Simulates the most common front panel indicator lights on external
modems. You can control whether this feature displays by selecting Modem
LEDs from the View menu.
o Connect status
If connected to a port, this field displays the word Connected and the
elapsed time for the current connection in hours, minutes, and seconds.
If HyperACCESS isn't connected to a port, this field displays the word
Disconnected.
o Terminal emulation
Displays the terminal emulator for this session; the Scroll Lock
indicator (SL) when Scroll Lock is on; the Num Lock indicator (NL) when
Num Lock is on; the Caps Lock indicator (CL) when Caps Lock is on; and
the Capture indicator (Capt) when you've selected Capture to file or
(Prn) for Capture to printer. When HyperACCESS is executing a program,
this field displays the program filename.
o Communications settings
Displays the baud rate, number of data bits, parity, and number of stop
bits.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.254. Call Log Panel View - Modem LEDs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Modem LEDs includes the Modem LED display in the
status bar at the bottom of the window. The selection you make applies to all
panels.
This feature simulates the most common front panel indicator lights on external
modems. With devices other than modems, such as direct cable connections, the
LEDs indicate equivalent status information.
The modem LEDs are:
o AA
Auto Answer
o CD
Carrier Detect
o OH
Off Hook
o RD
Receive Data
o SD
Send Data
o TR
Terminal Ready
o MR
Modem Ready
Note: A modem's MR indicator cannot be read by software, so HyperACCESS
infers this state from the modem's DSR (Data Set Ready) signal.
Note: The LED display closely matches actual modem indicators, but it's not
precisely in sync, due to OS/2 communications drivers and buffering.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.255. Call Log Panel View - Panel Tabs ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When selected (checked), Panel tabs displays the tabs at the bottom of each
panel. When unselected, the only way to change the current panel is to use the
Window menu. The selection you make applies to all panels.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.256. Call Log Automation Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can use the Call Log panel Automation menu to record and edit programs that
will operate HyperACCESS. It has the same four choices as its phonebook panel
counterpart: Run, Abort, Edit Program, Buttons. These choices are a subset of
the Terminal panel Automation menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.257. Call Log Automation - Run ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Run... to display a standard file browse dialog, where you can select a
drive, directory, and file to run a program. The file you select can be an
automatically generated REXX program, or any .EXE program that uses the
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface (HAPI).
Related Information
HyperACCESS Application Programming Interface Manual
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.258. Call Log Automation - Abort ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Abort to terminate the automatic program being run. This choice is
dimmed or grayed out (unavailable) unless a program is executing.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.259. Call Log Automation - Edit Program ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Edit Program... to display a standard file browse dialog where you can
select a drive, directory, and file that contains the source program you want
to edit. When selected, the file is opened in OS/2's System (or Enhanced)
Editor, or whichever editor (text viewer) you've specified in the External
Utilities dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.260. Call Log Automation - Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Buttons... to display a dialog where you can define or modify
system-defined buttons that appear in the button bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.261. Call Log Window Menu ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can use the Call Log panel Window menu to select a panel to make active.
You'll need this capability when you turn panel tabs off. The Call Log panel
Window menu has the same items as its phonebook panel counterpart: Terminal,
Main Phonebook, Host Mode, Call Log, Lists. The currently active panel appears
with a check mark.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.262. Call Log Window - Terminal ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Terminal to display the Terminal panel where you interact with the
remote system.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.263. Call Log Window - Main Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Main Phonebook to display the phonebook panel containing the default
phonebook. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.264. Call Log Window - Host Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Host Mode to display the phonebook panel containing host mode phonebook
entries. If you change the name or delete this phonebook, the menu list
reflects the change.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.265. Call Log Window - Other Phonebooks ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Any additional phonebooks that you create appear in this menu. The name that
appears in the list is the same name that appears on the panel tab.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.266. Call Log Window - Call Log ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Call Log to display the Call Log panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.267. Call Log Window - Lists ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select Lists to display the Lists panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.268. Modify ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select the Modify choice from a button pop-up menu to display the Button
dialog. You can then change the appearance, action, and help text for the
button. The changes you make will affect this button wherever it appears.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.269. New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select the New choice from a button pop-up menu to display the Button dialog.
You can then create a new button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.270. Copy ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select the Copy choice from a button pop-up menu to display the Button dialog.
You can then copy this button to create a new button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 5.271. Delete ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Select the Delete choice from a button pop-up menu to delete the button from
the button bar. Before taking this action, HyperACCESS will display a message
asking you to confirm that you want to remove the button. If you answer Yes,
this button will be deleted wherever it appears.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6. Procedures ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
This list includes common tasks for users of HyperACCESS for OS/2.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.1. Adding a Phonebook Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Several techniques are available for creating a phonebook entry.
1. First, perform one of the following actions:
o With your mouse pointer over any existing phonebook entry, click
mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the
phonebook panel pop-up menu. Then select New....
o Click the Create new phonebook entry button in the button bar.
o From the menu bar, select File/New....
Any of these actions opens the Terminal panel with an untitled
phonebook and displays the Description dialog.
2. Enter a system name (up to 3 lines of text), select an icon, and specify
a phonebook for the entry. In most cases, you'll leave the default
Session Type as Terminal and the default terminal type, which comes from
the New Phonebook Entry Template, as specified.
Note: If you want to create a new host phonebook entry, select the Host
radio button. This disables selection of the terminal type because it
uses special settings for answering incoming calls.
When you click OK, HyperACCESS changes the title bar to include the
phonebook name you've specified, and displays the Communications dialog.
The contents of this dialog vary depending on the type of connection
selected (modem, direct cable, TCP/IP). Default values in this dialog
come from the New Phonebook Entry Template.
3. Enter a phone number in this dialog or in the Communications properties
sheet before you can place a call with this phonebook entry. If you
don't, you'll see a warning dialog telling you that you must enter the
phone number.
4. If necessary, change the connection or communications settings.
5. Click OK You can make additional changes to the phonebook entry, save the
entry, or initiate communication with the remote system.
6. To save the phonebook entry, select File/Save, File/Save As, or
File/Exit. Any of these display the Save As dialog.
7. Accept the suggested filename (based on the name you entered in the
Description dialog), or enter a new filename in Save as Filename.
(Because HAO is the default extension used to display entries in
phonebooks, use this extension for phonebook entry filenames.)
8. Click OK. HyperACCESS saves the current phonebook entry parameters in the
file specified and creates the phonebook entry with the icon and system
name specified.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.2. Calling a Phonebook Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS comes with two predefined phonebooks, Main and Host. You can add
your own custom phonebooks and copy or move entries from one phonebook to
another. To select a phonebook, click its tab.
To call an existing phonebook entry, use one of the following techniques:
o Double-click
With the proper phonebook panel displayed:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the icon representing the system you want
to call.
2. Double-click the entry.
HyperACCESS opens the Terminal panel, sends modem initialization
commands, and dials the number listed in your phonebook entry.
o Connect option
With the proper phonebook panel displayed:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the phonebook entry you want to call.
2. Select it by clicking on it one time.
3. Perform one of the following actions:
- Click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display
the phonebook panel pop-up menu. Then select Connect.
- Click the Connect phonebook entry button in the button bar.
- From the menu bar, select File/Connect.
HyperACCESS opens the Terminal panel, sends modem initialization
commands, and dials the number listed in your phonebook entry.
o Connect and Record Logon option
With the proper phonebook panel displayed:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the phonebook entry you want to call.
2. Select it by clicking on it one time.
3. Perform one of the following actions:
- Click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display
the phonebook panel pop-up menu. Then select File/Connect and
Record Logon.
- From the menu bar, select File/Connect and Record Logon.
HyperACCESS displays the Terminal panel, dials the number, and
displays the Recording in Progress window.
o Connect but Skip Logon option
Use this option to record a new logon script.With the proper phonebook
panel displayed:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the phonebook entry you want to call.
2. Select it by clicking on it one time.
3. Perform one of the following actions:
- Click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display
the phonebook panel pop-up menu. Then select Connect and Record
Logon.
- From the menu bar, select File/Connect but skip logon to
connect without using the entry's logon script.
HyperACCESS displays the Terminal panel and dials the number.
o Open
With the proper phonebook panel displayed:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the phonebook entry you want to call.
2. Select it by clicking on it one time.
3. Display the Terminal panel by performing one of the following
actions:
- Click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display
the phonebook panel pop-up menu. Then select Open.
- Click the Open phonebook entry button in the button bar. Then
select File/Open.
4. Change any communications parameters, or compose a message in
Message Pad, before initiating the connection.
o From the Terminal panel, connect to the remote system using any of the
following techniques:
- Select File/Connect.
This option initializes the modem and dials the number listed in
your phonebook entry.
- Select File/Connect and record logon or click the Connect and record
logon button in the button bar to have HyperACCESS learn a new logon
sequence.
- Select File/Connect but skip logon to connect without using the
entry's logon script. Use this option to record a new logon script.
- Click the Connect phonebook entry button in the button bar. This
option performs the same function as File/Connect.
- Type in the terminal screen to manually enter dialing commands.
(When you type in the Terminal panel, HyperACCESS automatically
opens the communications port without dialing.)
o Button bar
There are three standard buttons in the phonebook panel that provide
similar tech- niques. They are:
- Dial (Connect phonebook entry)
Performs the same function as File/Connect (see above).
- Open (Open phonebook entry)
Displays the Terminal panel with parameters set for the selected
phonebook entry. For instructions on connecting from the Terminal
panel, see above.
- Record (Connect and record logon)
Performs the same function as File/Connect and Record Logon (see
above).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.3. Calling CompuServe ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS comes with a complete logon script for calling CompuServe. To call
CompuServe and add your logon name and password to the script, use the
procedure that follows.
With the Main Phonebook panel displayed and active:
1. Move the mouse pointer to the CompuServe icon and double-click the left
mouse button.
2. A Telephone Number dialog appears with CompuServe's 800 number listed in
the Telephone Number edit field. If you have a local number for
CompuServe, enter it here (your calls to CompuServe will be cheaper if
you use the local number). Check the Save as phonebook entry telephone
number check box to make the local number permanent.
3. Click Dial to call CompuServe. HyperACCESS will send modem initialization
commands and dial the number.
4. Once you connect with CompuServe the Enter User ID dialog appears. Type
in your ID and select the Save as permanent value check box.
5. When the Enter Password dialog appears, type in your password and select
the Save as permanent value check box. You can now start your CompuServe
phonebook entry.
6. After you hang up with CompuServe, be sure to answer Yes to save the
changes made to the CompuServe phonebook entry. The next time you call
CompuServe, HyperACCESS will enter your user ID and password for you.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.4. Calling Multiple Systems ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can use HyperACCESS to communicate concurrently with any number of remote
systems, as long as you have a communications port for each and enough system
memory for all.
For each connection, you start another instance of HyperACCESS. Each instance
is independent of the others. You can, however, cut and paste between
instances, using the Clipboard.
To be able to start multiple instances of HyperACCESS, set Object open behavior
on the HyperACCESS Settings Window page to Create new window.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.5. Calling Systems Not in a Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Systems might not appear in a phonebook for the following reasons:
o After adding a remote system to a phonebook, you exited without saving
the phonebook entry.
o The phonebook entry filename doesn't end with an HAO extension.
o The phonebook entry file isn't in the user data directory. For example,
it may reside on a floppy disk.
o The phonebook entry is in another phonebook.
If you're calling a system that doesn't appear in the phonebook for any of
these reasons, you can use File/Import to access the phonebook entry file. If
you're calling a system for the first time, or one that hasn't been saved
before, follow the steps in Adding a Phonebook Entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.6. Capturing Text to a File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You have two basic methods of capturing text to a file: you can capture text
directly to a file as the text arrives, or you can copy received text from the
Terminal panel to a file.
To capture text to a file as the text arrives:
1. Start a communications connection with a remote system.
2. Click the Terminal tab at the bottom of the HyperACCESS window. The
Terminal panel is displayed.
3. Display the Capture to File dialog by doing one of the following:
o Select Capture to file/Start from the Terminal panel's pop-up menu
(click mouse button 2 on the terminal area to display the menu).
o Click the Toggle capturing to file button on the Terminal panel
button bar.
o Select File/Capture to file/Start from the Terminal panel's menu
bar.
4. If you have defined a default capture file, that filename appears in the
File edit field. If the field is blank or you want to specify another
capture file, type the path and filename to use or click the Browse
button to help you find a path and filename. If you specify a directory
or filename that does not exist, HyperACCESS creates it for you.
5. Select a choice from the group If File Already Exists. (Click the Help
button if you need explanations of these choices.)
6. Select a choice from the group Capture Mode. (Click the Help button if
you need explanations of these choices.)
7. To save these settings for future sessions, click the Make these the
default settings check box.
8. Click the Start push button to begin capturing information to the capture
file.
9. To stop, pause, or resume file capture, select File/Capture to File from
the menu bar. Then select Stop, Pause, or Resume from the cascaded menu.
To copy received text from the terminal area or Backscroll Buffer to a file:
1. Use the vertical scroll bar until the beginning or end of the section you
want to capture is visible in the Terminal panel.
2. With your mouse, select the characters, words, or lines to capture.
3. Select Edit/Copy to File from the menu bar. The Copy to File dialog is
displayed.
4. Enter a path and filename or use the Browse button to find a path and
filename.
5. Select Append or Overwrite. (Click the Help button if you need
explanations of these choices.)
6. Click the Copy button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.7. Capturing Terminal Area and Backscroll Buffer Data ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can copy information from the terminal area or Backscroll Buffer to a file
to save your current interaction. Follow these steps:
1. Use the vertical scroll bar, if necessary, until the beginning or end of
the section you want to capture is visible in the Terminal panel.
2. Select the characters, words, or lines of text to copy. You can
double-click to highlight a single word, and extend in either direction;
or position the mouse pointer anywhere in the text and perform normal
text selection.
3. To display the Copy to File dialog, perform one of the following actions:
o Select Edit/Copy to File... from the menu bar.
o Position the mouse pointer over the selected text and click mouse
button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the pop-up menu.
Then select Copy to File... from the pop-up menu.
4. Enter a filename (with path, if necessary), or use the Browse... push
button.
5. Select Append or Overwrite.
6. Click Copy.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.8. Capturing Text as It Arrives ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Before you can begin capturing incoming text, you must display the Terminal
panel.
To capture your interaction with the remote system, follow these steps:
1. Perform one of these actions to display the Capture to File dialog:
o Click mouse button 2 on a blank space in the Terminal panel to
display the Terminal panel pop-up menu. Then select Start... from
the Capture to File cascade menu.
o Click the Toggle capturing to file button in the button bar.
o Select Start... from the File/Capture to Filecascade menu.
2. If you've defined a default capture file for the phonebook entry, that
filename appears in the File edit field. If you don't have a default
capture file defined for the entry, either type a path and filename or
click the Browse... push button to help you specify a capture file.
3. Select one of the options in the group If File Already Exists. The
options are:
o Append
If the file exists, adds new session interaction to the end of the
current file. If the file doesn't exist, this option creates the
file (the default).
o Overwrite
If the file exists, deletes the old file and creates a new capture
file. If the file doesn't exist, this option creates the file.
o Rename by date
HyperACCESS creates filenames using the specified extension plus the
first letter of the filename with date/sequence appended. The
date/sequence format is MMDD999, where MM is the month (values 01 to
12), DD is the day (values 01 to 31), and 999 is a sequence number
from 000 to 999 for the files created on that date.
o Rename sequentially
Appends a sequence number from 0 to 999 to the end of the filename.
If the name is already at its maximum length (254 or 8), the
sequence number replaces characters at the end of the name.
4. Select one of the options in the group Capture Mode. The options are:
o Characters
Captures all incoming information except escape sequences.
o Lines
Captures each line when the carriage return at its end is received.
It also captures the line you're on when you stop or suspend
capturing (the default).
o Screens
Captures the entire screen whenever the remote system clears the
screen or you stop or suspend capturing.
o Raw data
Captures all incoming information, including escape sequences.
5. Select the Make these the default settings check box. if you want all
changes you've made in this dialog to become default settings for future
sessions.
6. Click Start to return to the Terminal panel and begin capturing
information.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.9. Changing a Phonebook Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can change a phonebook entry from either a phonebook or the Terminal panel.
This procedure assumes that the parameter you want to modify is one of the
standard communications parameters, such as phone number. However, the
procedure is the same for any other parameter; simply select the appropriate
Properties sheet.
1. If necessary, select the tab that corresponds to the phonebook that
contains the entry. If the phonebook entry is already open, select the
Terminal panel Properties menu to display the Properties cascade menu and
skip to step 4.
2. Select the phonebook entry.
3. To display the Communications properties sheet from a phonebook panel,
perform one of the following actions:
o With the mouse pointer over the selected phonebook entry, click
mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the pop-up
menu. Then select Properties to display the Properties cascade menu.
Select Communications... from the cascade menu to display the
Communications properties sheet.
o Click the Phonebook entry settings button to display the Description
properties sheet. Select the Communications tab to display the
Communications properties sheet.
o From the menu bar, select File/Properties to display the Properties
cascade menu. Select Communications... from the cascade menu to
display the Communications properties sheet.
4. Modify parameters as required.
5. Click OK to activate your modification.
Note: HyperACCESS automatically saves parameters modified in a phonebook
panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.10. Changing Phonebook Appearance ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To change the appearance of a phonebook, take these steps:
1. With the phonebook panel displayed, perform one of the following actions:
o Click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) on an empty
space in the phonebook panel to display the pop-up menu.
o Select View from the menu bar.
2. Select Icons, Details., Entry names, or File names.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.11. Changing File Transfer Protocol Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can change file transfer protocol settings from either a phonebook panel or
the Terminal panel. Regardless of where you make changes to these settings,
each phonebook entry has its own uniquely saved values. This feature means you
can access multiple remote systems using the same protocol (for example,
Zmodem), and you can define each phonebook entry with its own combination of
settings.
This section outlines procedures for accessing the protocol Settings dialog.
From a Phonebook Panel
When you change protocol settings from the phonebook panel, you specify default
values. You can also modify these values from the Terminal panel.
To access a protocol's Settings dialog from the phonebook panel:
1. With a phonebook entry selected, perform one of the following actions:
o With the mouse pointer over the selected phonebook entry, click
button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the pop-up menu.
Select Properties to display the Properties cascade menu. Select
File Transfer... to display the File Transfer properties sheet.
o Click the Phonebook entry settings button to display the Description
properties sheet. Select the File Transfer tab to display the File
Transfer properties sheet.
o From the menu bar, select File/Properties to display the Properties
cascade menu. Select File Transfer... to display the File Transfer
properties sheet.
2. In the Default File Transfer Protocols group, select the desired file
transfer protocol from the For receiving and For sending drop-down lists.
3. Click the appropriate Settings... push button.
Note: If both sending and receiving protocols are the same, either
Settings... button affects both directions.
4. Make your selections from the protocol settings dialog, and click OK.
You can change default receiving or sending directories using one of the
following techniques:
o Use the drop-down list of the combo box to select a directory from the
history list of previously used directories.
o Use the Browse... push button to select a directory.
o Type a relative or absolute (full) path in the edit field of the
drop-down combo box.
When you exit the Properties notebook by clicking OK, HyperACCESS
automatically saves all changes you've made for the current phonebook entry.
From the Terminal Panel
You can either specify default transfer protocol settings for a phonebook
entry, or modify settings from within the Receive or Send dialogs.
To access a protocol's Settings dialog from the Terminal panel:
1. Perform one of the following actions to display the File Transfer
properties sheet:
o Click the Settings button. This action displays the Communications
properties sheet of the Properties notebook. Select the File
Transfer tab to display the File Transfer properties sheet.
o From the menu bar, select Properties/File Transfer....
2. In the Default File Transfer Protocols group, select the file transfer
protocol you want to use from the For receiving and For sending drop-down
lists.
3. Click the appropriate Settings... push button.
Note: If both sending and receiving protocols are the same, either
Settings... button affects both directions.
4. Make your selections from the protocol-unique dialog, and click OK..
You can change default receiving or sending directories using one of the
following techniques:
o Use the drop-down list of the combo box to select a directory from the
history list of previously used directories.
o Use the Browse... push button to select a directory.
o Type a relative or absolute (full) path in the edit field of the
drop-down combo box.
When you exit the Properties notebook by clicking OK, HyperACCESS
automatically saves all changes you've made for the current phonebook entry.
Changing Send or Receive Protocol Settings on the Fly
You can change send or receive settings as you are getting ready to transfer
files.
1. Select Transfer/Receive (download)... or Transfer/Send (upload).....
2. Select the file transfer protocol you want to use from the Transfer
protocol drop-down list.
3. Click Settings....
Note: If both sending and receiving protocols are the same, either
Settings... button affects both directions.
4. Make your selections from the protocol-unique dialog, and click OK.
Changes you've made aren't saved for the phonebook entry.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix E, File Transfer Protocols
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.12. Changing Terminal Emulator Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can change terminal emulator settings from either a phonebook or the
Terminal panel. Regardless of where you make changes to these settings, each
phonebook entry has its own uniquely saved values. This feature means you can
access multiple remote systems with the same basic emulator (for example,
VT100), and you can define each phonebook entry with its own combination of
setting values.
This section outlines various procedures for accessing Terminal Emulator
Properties notebook sheet and emulator-specific dialogs.
From Phonebook
The Terminal Emulator properties sheet has settings that are common to all
terminal emulators, and it provides access to a dialog that has
emulator-specific options. To access this sheet and dialog for any terminal
emulator:
1. With a phonebook entry selected, perform one of the following actions to
display the Terminal Emulator properties sheet:
o With the mouse pointer over the selected phonebook entry, click
mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the pop-up
menu. Select Properties to display the Properties cascade menu.
Select Terminal Emulator... to display the Terminal Emulator
properties sheet.
o Click the Phonebook entry settings button to display the Description
properties sheet. Select the Terminal Emulator tab to display the
Terminal Emulator properties sheet.
o From the menu bar, select File/Properties. Then select Terminal
Emulator... to display the Terminal Emulator properties sheet.
2. Make selections by clicking on radio buttons, or change the number of
rows and columns using the spin buttons (or edit fields).
3. Select the desired terminal emulator from the Terminal drop-down list.
4. Click the Settings... push button to display an emulator-specific dialog
for additional settings.
5. Make selections from the emulator-specific dialog, and click OK.
When you exit the Properties notebook, HyperACCESS automatically saves all
changes you've made for the current phonebook entry.
From the Terminal Panel
The Terminal Emulator properties sheet has settings that are common to all
terminal emulators, and it provides access to a dialog that has
emulator-specific options.
To access this sheet and dialog for any terminal emulator:
1. Perform one of the following actions to display the Terminal Emulator
properties sheet:
o Click the Settings button to display the Communications properties
sheet. Select the Terminal Emulator tab to display the Terminal
Emulator properties sheet.
o From the menu bar, select Properties/Terminal Emulator... to display
the Terminal Emulator properties sheet.
2. Make selections by clicking on radio buttons, or change the number of
rows and columns using the spin buttons (or edit fields).
3. Select the terminal emulator from the Terminal drop-down list.
4. Click the Settings... push button to display an emulator-specific dialog
for additional settings.
5. Make selections from the emulator-specific dialog, and click OK.
When you exit the Properties notebook, HyperACCESS automatically saves all
changes you've made for the current phonebook entry.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix D, Terminal Emulator Characteristics
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.13. Configuring COM Ports ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
By default, OS/2 installs only COM1 and COM2, using their default port
addresses and IRQs:
o COM1
- Address - 3F8H
- IRQ - 5
o COM2
- Address - 2F8H
- IRQ - 3
You can specify other COM ports in the CONFIG.SYS file, as follows:
DEVICE=X:\OS2\COM.SYS (n, addr, IRQ) (n, addr, IRQ)
where:
X=your boot drive (C, D, etc.)
n=port number (1, 2, 3, or 4)
addr=port address (a hexadecimal number)
IRQ=IRQ number (2, 3, 4, 5, etc.)
For example, you might include
DEVICE=C:\OS2\COM.SYS (3,3E8,5)
to specify COM3 at address 3E8H and IRQ5.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.14. Connecting from the Terminal Panel ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When you have opened a phonebook entry and displayed the Terminal Panel, you
can connect to a remote system using any of these methods:
o From the menu bar, select File/Connect, File/Connect and record logon, or
File/Connect but skip logon.
o Left-click the Connect phonebook entry button in the button bar (the
third button from the left, with the dialing finger).
o Type dialing commands in the Terminal screen.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.15. Closing the Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To close the Phonebook, use one of these methods.
o Double-click the system menu symbol (at the top left of the window).
o Click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) on the system menu
symbol (at the top left of the window); then select Close.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.16. Copying a Phonebook Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can copy a phonebook entry to another phonebook, or copy a phonebook entry
as an alternative technique for creating a new entry. In addition, you can copy
a phonebook entry from a list file.
o Copying a phonebook entry to another phonebook
To copy a phonebook entry (create a shadow) from one phonebook to
another, follow these steps.
1. Select the tab that displays the phonebook with the entry you want
to copy.
2. Press Ctrl+Shift+mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) on
the phonebook entry you want to copy.
3. Keep the keys pressed while you drag the phonebook entry to the tab
of the new phonebook. This creates a shadow of the original entry.
Any changes to one of these entries, regardless of phonebook,
changes the other.
To create a copy of a phonebook entry with its own set of properties
(and possibly a new name), follow the steps in the next section.
o Copying a phonebook entry to create a new entry
One of the easiest ways to create a new entry that is similar to an
existing one is to follow these steps:
1. Select the tab that displays the phonebook with the entry you want
to copy.
2. Select an existing entry that has similar characteristics, or select
the New Phonebook Entry Template entry by clicking on it once.
3. Perform one of the following actions:
- With the mouse pointer over the selected phonebook entry, click
mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the
pop-up menu. Then select Open.
- Click the Open button.
- Select File/Open.
Any of these actions displays the Terminal panel with the
selected phonebook entry open.
4. Select File/Save As... from the Terminal panel. This action displays
the Description dialog so you can change the phonebook entry name,
icon, and phonebook.
Enter an entry name (up to three lines of text), select an icon, and
specify a phonebook for the entry. In most cases, you'll leave the
default entry type as Terminal and the default terminal type, which
comes from the New Phonebook Entry Template, as specified.
If you want to create a new host phonebook entry, select the Host
radio button. This disables selection of the terminal type because
it uses special settings for answering incoming calls.
When you click OK, HyperACCESS changes the title bar to include the
phonebook name you've specified.
5. Accept the suggested filename (based on the name you entered in the
Description dialog), or enter a new filename in Save as Filename.
(Because HAO is the default extension used to display entries in
phonebooks, we recommend that you always use this extension for
phonebook entry filenames.)
6. Click OK. HyperACCESS saves the current phonebook entry parameters
in the file specified, and creates the phonebook entry with the icon
and entry name specified.
o Copying a phonebook entry from a list file
HyperACCESS comes with several lists. In addition, you can download other
lists from various bulletin board systems and online services, or export
lists from contact programs and personal information managers (PIMs).
Some of these lists are very large (for example, the FIDO list is 3 MB).
To copy one or more entries from a list file to a phonebook, you must
first define a template if one doesn't already exist. If you're using one
of the list files that come with HyperACCESS, the templates already
exist.
Once you've established your list file template, follow these steps:
1. Select the Lists tab to display the Lists panel. HyperACCESS
displays the last list file you selected. If this is your first time
in this panel, or you want to use a different list file, select
File/Open... to display a standard file selection dialog. Use this
dialog to open the list file you want.
2. Select one or more entries in the list using standard mouse or
keyboard selection techniques.
3. To copy the entries to a phonebook do one of the following to
display the Description dialog:
- Double-click or click mouse button 2 (by default, the right
button) on an entry to display the Lists panel pop-up menu.
Select Copy to Phonebook....
- Click the Copy to Phonebook button.
- Drag the entries onto the phonebook tab.
4. HyperACCESS displays the Description dialog with the entry name from
the list. You can change the name and phonebook, and select an icon.
When you click OK, you see the Communications dialog with the phone
number and other information from the list.
5. You can change the phone number or any other settings. Click OK when
you are ready to accept the settings.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.17. Copying a Phonebook Entry to Another Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To copy a phonebook entry (create a shadow) from one phonebook to another,
follow these steps.
1. Select the tab that displays the phonebook with the entry you want to
copy.
2. Press Ctrl+Shift+mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) on the
phonebook entry you want to copy.
3. Keep the keys pressed while you drag the phonebook entry to the tab of
the new phonebook. This creates a shadow of the original entry. Any
changes to one of these entries, regardless of phonebook, changes the
other.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.18. Copying a Phonebook Entry to Create a New Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
One of the easiest ways to create a new entry that is similar to an existing
one is to follow these steps:
1. Select the tab that displays the phonebook with the entry you want to
copy.
2. Select an existing entry that has similar characteristics, or select the
New Phonebook Entry Template entry by clicking on it once.
3. Perform one of the following actions:
o With the mouse pointer over the selected phonebook entry, click
mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the pop-up
menu. Then select Open.
o Click the Open button.
o Select File/Open.
Any of these actions displays the Terminal panel with the selected
phonebook entry open.
4. Select File/Save As... from the Terminal panel. This action displays the
Description dialog so you can change the phonebook entry name, icon, and
phonebook.
Enter an entry name (up to three lines of text), select an icon, and
specify a phonebook for the entry. In most cases, you'll leave the
default entry type as Terminal and the default terminal type, which comes
from the New Phonebook Entry Template, as specified.
If you want to create a new host phonebook entry, select the Host radio
button. This disables selection of the terminal type because it uses
special settings for answering incoming calls.
When you click OK, HyperACCESS changes the title bar to include the
phonebook name you've specified.
5. Accept the suggested filename (based on the name you entered in the
Description dialog), or enter a new filename in Save as Filename.
(Because HAO is the default extension used to display entries in
phonebooks, we recommend that you always use this extension for phonebook
entry filenames.)
6. Click OK. HyperACCESS saves the current phonebook entry parameters in the
file specified, and creates the phonebook entry with the icon and entry
name specified.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.19. Copying a Phonebook Entry from a List File ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS comes with several lists. In addition, you can download other lists
from various bulletin board systems and online services, or export lists from
contact programs and personal information managers (PIMs). Some of these lists
are very large (for example, the FIDO list is 3 MB).
To copy one or more entries from a list file to a phonebook, you must first
define a template if one doesn't already exist. If you're using one of the list
files that come with HyperACCESS, the templates already exist.
Once you've established your list file template, follow these steps:
1. Select the Lists tab to display the Lists panel. HyperACCESS displays the
last list file you selected. If this is your first time in this panel, or
you want to use a different list file, select File/Open... to display a
standard file selection dialog. Use this dialog to open the list file you
want.
2. Select one or more entries in the list using standard mouse or keyboard
selection techniques.
3. To copy the entries to a phonebook do one of the following to display the
Description dialog:
o Double-click or click button 2 (by default, the right button) on an
entry to display the Lists panel pop-up menu. Then select Copy to
Phonebook....
o Click the Copy to Phonebook button.
o Drag the entries onto the phonebook tab.
4. HyperACCESS displays the Description dialog with the entry name from the
list. You can change the name and phonebook, and select an icon. When you
click OK, you see the Communications dialog with the phone number and
other information from the list.
5. You can change the phone number or any other settings. Click OK when you
are ready to accept the settings.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.20. Copying Text From Message Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can easily save information you enter in the Message Pad following these
steps:
1. Select the text to be copied by moving the mouse pointer (I-beam) to the
beginning of the text.
2. Double-click the word and/or drag the I-beam until you've selected the
text you want.
3. Note: You can select all text in the Message Pad by selecting the
Edit/Select All menu choice or using the C+/ shortcut key.
4. Copy to the file using one of the following techniques:
o Use the pop-up menu (mouse button 2) and select Copy to File.....
o Select the Edit/Copy to/File... menu choice.
o Use the dialog to indicate what you want to do if the file exists.
o Enter the filename, use the drop-down file list, or click the
Browse... button to select an existing file.
5. Click the Copy button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.21. Copying Text to Message Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
There are several techniques available to copy text from the terminal area or
Backscroll Buffer to the Message Pad. One technique is:
1. Move the mouse pointer (I-beam) to the place in the Message Pad where you
want to copy the selected text, and click.
2. Select the text in the terminal area and/or Backscroll Buffer that you
want to copy by moving the mouse pointer (I-beam) to the beginning of the
text. You can double-click a word and/or drag the I-beam until you've
selected desired text. (You can select text from anywhere within the
terminal area and/or Backscroll Buffer.)
3. Use the Edit/Copy to Message Pad menu choice on the Terminal panel to
copy the selected text.
Alternatively, you can:
1. Select the text to be copied by moving the mouse pointer (I-beam) to the
beginning of the text.
2. Double-click a word and/or drag the I-beam until you've selected the
text. (You can select text from anywhere within the terminal/Backscroll
Buffer.)
3. Select the Edit/Copy menu choice (or Ctrl+Insert copy shortcut key) to
copy the selected text to the Clipboard.
4. Move the mouse pointer (I-beam) to the place in Message Pad where you
want to copy the selected text and click.
5. Paste from the Clipboard to Message Pad using one of the following
techniques:
o Use the pop-up menu (mouse button 2), and select Paste.
o Use the Paste button.
o Use Shift+Insert shortcut key.
o Select the Edit/Paste menu choice.
You can also copy text from a file to the Message Pad with these steps:
1. Move the mouse pointer (I-beam) to the place in the Message Pad where you
want to insert the file.
2. Use one of the following techniques to paste from a file:
o Select Paste from File... from the pop-up menu.
o Select the Edit/Paste from File... menu choice.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.22. Creating Buttons ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can assign either a text or bitmap button to any combination of key
strokes, a menu command, or to execute a program. You can define buttons for
any HyperACCESS panel or phonebook entry. Each panel and phonebook entry has
its own set of buttons.
From any panel menu bar you can select Automation/Buttons... to display the
Buttons for <panel name> dialog. From the Terminal panel, this selection
defines buttons for the current phonebook entry, and the dialog title is
Buttons for <phonebook entry>.
1. From the dialog, select a button in the list and click Modify..., or
New... to create a new button. Either of these actions displays the
Button dialog.
2. Click a radio button to select the button type you want: Macro text,
Command, or Program.
For a text button, simply enter the text string you want displayed on the
button. For example, you could create a button with "Send" or "Send File"
on it. As you type text in the Text edit field, the characters appear on
the sample button at the bottom right of the dialog.
To assign a bitmap button, select one of the predefined buttons, or click
the Import Icon... button.
3. You then assign one of the following actions to the button:
o Click the Macro text button to activate the edit field and then
enter keystrokes that you want HyperACCESS to output when you click
the button. For example:
- 2 displays <F2>.
- Shift+2 displays <SHIFT-F2>.
- Ctrl+Shift+2 displays <CTRL-SHIFT-F2>.
You may enter any key combination including, for example, a
user's name.
Note: The Macro radio button and edit field are available only on
the Terminal panel because they operate only on the terminal
screen.
o Select a menu command from the Command drop-down list. You can
assign only one command to a key combination. Commands in the list
include all HyperACCESS menu selections for the current panel. This
feature enables you to perform any operation with a single click.
o Specify a program to run using the Program edit field, drop-down
list, or Browse... button.
4. If you like, enter a line of button help information in the Help edit
field. This line displays whenever you hold the mouse pointer over a
button for a couple of seconds.
5. Click OK to return to the Button for <phonebook entry> ( or <panel name>)
dialog.
6. Click OK to complete the button definition.
The button appears along with the standard HyperACCESS buttons in the
button bar.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.23. Creating a Custom Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS comes with two predefined phonebooks:
o Main Phonebook - the default phonebook.
o Host Mode - a phonebook with a single entry that lets you set up
HyperACCESS to answer calls from other PCs.
You can add phonebook entries to either of these predefined phonebooks, or you
can define a new phonebook and copy or add entries to it. Each phonebook you
create has its own panel tab.
You can create a new phonebook containing just the New Phonebook Entry
Template, or you can copy all phonebook entries from a current phonebook to a
new one.
To create a new phonebook follow these steps:
1. If necessary, select a phonebook panel tab to display a phonebook.
2. Select Phonebook/New... to display the Phonebook Name dialog.
3. Enter any name (up to 32 characters long) in the edit field and click OK.
This procedure creates a new phonebook panel with a tab using the name you
specified. The new phonebook has only one entry, New Phonebook Entry Template.
To copy all phonebook entries from a current phonebook to another, follow
these steps:
1. If necessary, select the phonebook panel tab to display the phonebook you
want to copy.
2. Select Phonebook/Copy... to display the Phonebook Name dialog.
3. Enter any name (up to 32 characters long) in the edit field and click OK.
This procedure creates a new phonebook panel with a tab using the name you
specified. The new phonebook has all the entries that were in the original.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.24. Creating a Connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can create a new connection when you define a new phonebook entry (from the
Communications dialog) or at any other time using the Communications properties
sheet.
To create a new connection, follow these steps: li.With the Communications
dialog or Communications properties sheet open, click the Change... button in
the Connect Via group box. The Existing Connections dialog is displayed.
1. Click the New Connection... button to display the Type of New Connection
dialog.
You can select the type of connection from a scrollable list. Once you
select a connection type, it becomes permanently associated with the
connection and can't be modified. Valid types include:
o Modem or modem pool
o Direct cable
o TCP/IP
2. Select a connection type and click OK. What happens next depends on the
type of connection you select.
For Modem or Modem Pool Connections
When you select Modem or modem pool, the Connection dialog for modems is
displayed. The default modem name comes from the New Phonebook Entry Template.
The modem selected determines the default modem initialization strings. You
can change the modem using the drop-down list, and you can manually modify the
initialization settings.
The Connect Through group box indicates the current physical connection. To
change the physical connection, click the Change... button in this group.
Continue with selections from this dialog:
1. Select a type of interface from the drop-down list.
2. Select a COM port from the list, or click the Don't Know... button to
have HyperACCESS list and test all available COM ports on your computer.
After the test, it shows you the available ports and specifies if any
respond to modem commands. To see the sequence of steps and dialog boxes
for automatic testing of COM Ports, see Testing COM Ports, below.
Note: You can select a COM port from the list or enter a non- standard
port name used by a third-party communications driver in the edit field.
3. When you've selected an interface type and COM port, click OK. All
intermediate dialogs disappear and the Existing Connections dialog
reappears with the new connection defined as specified.
4. Click OK to return to the Communications dialog or Communications
properties sheet.
For Direct Cable
HyperACCESS displays the Connect Through dialog for direct cable. Continue
with selections from this dialog:
1. Select a Type of interface from the drop-down list. Choices in this list
include:
o Standard COM Port
o OS/2 Shared Port
2. Select a COM port from the list, or click the Don't Know... button to
have HyperACCESS list and test all available COM ports on your computer.
After the test, it shows you the available ports and specifies if any
respond to modem commands. For a direct cable connection, pick a port
that indicates no modem. For the sequence of steps and dialogs for
automatic testing of COM ports, see Testing COM Ports, below.
Note: You can select a COM port from the list or enter a non- standard
port name used by a third-party communications driver in the edit field.
3. When you've selected an interface type and COM port, click OK. All
intermediate dialogs disappear and the Existing Connections dialog
reappears with the new connection defined as specified.
4. Click OK to return to the Communications dialog or Communications
properties sheet.
Testing COM Ports
If you click the Don't Know... button, HyperACCESS displays the Test Ports
dialog.
After initiating testing, the Test Ports dialog is displayed. You can use the
Cancel button to halt testing.
Following testing of ports, the Connected Through dialog is displayed. The
default selection depends on whether you're testing ports for a modem or
direct connection. Each tested COM port has one of the following status
indications:
o Modem
A modem was detected on the COM port. This is the expected condition for
a modem or modem pool connection.
o No modem
The COM port is installed, but no modem was detected. This is the
expected condition for a direct cable connection.
o Not installed
OS/2 doesn't list this COM port as an available device.
o In use
The COM port is installed, but is currently in use by another program.
Exit any other communications or fax programs that are running and try
the test again.
For a modem, the default is the first port that has a modem. For a direct
cable connection, the default is the first port that does not have a modem, is
installed, and is not in use by another program.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.25. Creating a Keyboard Macro ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The following sections illustrate how you create keyboard macros. The first
example creates a keyboard macro to issue a hypothetical command to a remote
system to send a file using Zmodem. The second example illustrates how you
remap the keyboard using HyperACCESS's macro capability.
Macro to Issue a Host Command
This macro enables you to issue a commonly used host command to download a
standard parts database. To create the macro, perform the following steps:
1. Select the phonebook entry for the remote system.
2. Use one of the following actions to display the Terminal panel:
o With the mouse pointer over the selected phonebook entry, click
mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the pop-up
menu. Then select Open.
o Click the Open button on the button bar.
o Select File/Open.
3. Select Automation/Keys... (you can follow the same basic steps to assign
this macro to a button).
4. From the Keys for <phonebook entry> dialog, click the New... button.
5. In the Key edit field, press the key combination you want to use to issue
this command. For example, you might press 5.
6. In the Macro edit field, type the host command.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Keys for <phonebook entry> dialog, click OK.
You're now ready to use the 5 key to issue this host command.
Macro to Remap Keyboard
HyperACCESS maps the VT220 emulator's PF keys to F1-F10. (There's also an
option to map PF1-PF4 to the four keys above the keypad, to match the physical
location of these keys on actual DEC terminals.) Since the VT220 terminal
emulator and OS/2 both use these and other special PC keys (F1 for Help, Page
Up and Page Down for scrolling, and so on), there are some potential
conflicts. Fortunately, HyperACCESS provides several ways to deal with such
conflicts.
Each emulator that uses such keys has an option that lets you specify whether
the emulator or OS/2 will get these keys. If you're using the terminal
emulator to access systems where special terminal emulator keys aren't
required, you can simply devote these keys to OS/2 (the default). If you
choose to use these keys for terminal emulation, you can still use them to
control OS/2, by simply pressing Scroll Lock (selecting text also creates an
implicit Scroll Lock). During Scroll Lock, keys required for terminal
emulation revert to OS/2.
But suppose you need to use PF1-PF10 for terminal emulation, but also want to
be able to use F1-F10, and so on, for OS/2 control without having to press
Scroll Lock first. You can accomplish this by remapping PF1-PF10 to other
keys, such as Ctrl+Shift+1 through Ctrl+Shift+0 along the top row of the
keyboard.
As an illustration of the technique required to perform this task, follow
these steps to reassign the PF1 key to Ctrl+Shift+1.
1. Select the phonebook entry for the remote system.
2. Use one of the following actions to display the Terminal panel:
o With the mouse pointer over the selected phonebook entry, click
mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the pop-up
menu. Then select Open.
o Click the Open button on the button bar.
o Select File/Open.
3. Select Automation/Keys... to display the Keys for <phonebook
entry>dialog.
4. Click the New... button.
5. In the Key edit field, press Ctrl+Shift+1. Notice the resulting
<CTRL-SHIFT-1> in the edit field.
6. In the Macro edit field, press Insert, F1. Notice the resulting <F1> in
the edit field.
Note: You must press Insert because F1 normally displays help for a
dialog.
7. Click OK.
8. In the Keys for <phonebook entry> dialog, click OK.
You're now ready to use the Ctrl+Shift+1 key combination to issue the same
code as F1 to the host. Continue using the same procedure to reassign the
other function keys.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.26. Creating a List File Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
List files provide a compact way to obtain and store a large number of phone
numbers for remote systems. HyperACCESS comes with several predefined list
files. You can get additional lists from the Hilgraeve BBS and other sources.
Lists must be ASCII files, and each line must include at least a name and phone
number. Other entries are optional (see list below). Each list file must have a
template so that HyperACCESS can interpret the contents of the list.
When you first open a list file that doesn't have a template defined,
HyperACCESS displays a warning dialog, No Template Found. There are are two
options for creating a template for a list file from the dialog New and Copy.
Creating a New Template
To create a list file template from the No Template Found dialog, follow these
steps:
1. Select the New... button.
2. Enter a name in the Name edit field.
3. Use the Field separated by drop-down list to indicate how HyperACCESS
determines where fields begin and end. Choices in the drop-down list are:
Comma
Tab
Quote
Column Spacing
Note: In lists using Column Spacing, the first position of the line
is column 1.
4. Use the Name field location edit field to specify the position of the
data field that has the entry name. Enter the field number or column
number (depending on the separator selected).
5. Use the Phone number field location edit field to specify the position of
the data field that has the phone number. Enter the field number or
column number (depending on the separator selected).
6. Use the Data begins in line number edit field to specify the number of
lines to ignore at the beginning of the list file. You can ignore lines
at the beginning of a list file that are headings, notices, or other
text, and prevents you from accidently selecting lines that don't
represent remote systems.
7. Use the Comment lines begin with edit field to specify a special
character that defines comment lines. Lines that contain comments
typically begin with a specific character (for example, a semicolon) to
distinguish them from data lines. If there aren't any comments after the
initial header (see Data begins in line number, above), you can leave
this field blank.
8. Use the Add prefix to dial edit field to specify a prefix required before
dialing selected phone numbers.
9. Click OK to close the dialog.
10. To verify your template settings, select an entry in the list and click
either the Copy to phonebook or Place trial call button.
Copying a Template
To copy a template, follow these steps:
1. Select the Copy... push button. HyperACCESS displays the Which Template?
dialog.
2. Select a list file whose template is similar to the one you want to
create.
3. Change settings as required (see Creating a New Template above).
Related Information
Using List Files
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.27. Deleting a Phonebook Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To delete a phonebook entry, follow these steps:
1. Select the tab of the phonebook that contains the entry.
2. From the phonebook panel, select the entry you want to delete.
3. Perform one of the following actions to display the Delete Phonebook
Entry dialog.
o With the mouse pointer over the selected phonebook entry, click
mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) to display the pop-up
menu. Then select the Delete... menu choice.
o Press the Delete key.
o Select File/Delete....
4. In the Delete Phonebook Entry dialog, click one of the following push
buttons:
o Remove from Phonebook
Removes the phonebook entry from the current phonebook without
deleting its HAO file from the disk.
o Delete from Disk
Removes the phonebook entry from the current phonebook and deletes
its HAO file from the disk.
o Cancel
Closes the dialog without removing the phonebook entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.28. Deleting a Connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can delete a connection when you define a new phonebook entry (from the
Communications dialog) or at any other time using the Communications properties
sheet. To delete a connection, follow these steps:
1. From the Communications dialog or the Communications properties sheet,
select the Change... button in the Connect Via group box.
2. In the Existing Connections dialog, select the connection you want to
delete.
3. Click the Delete button.
4. Click OK when HyperACCESS displays the warning dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.29. Displaying Message Pad ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can display the Message Pad window from the Terminal panel using either of
the following techniques:
o Click the Message Pad button.
o Select View/Message Pad.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.30. Disconnecting from a Phonebook Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To disconnect from a communications connection with a phonebook entry, use one
of these methods:
o Press the Disconnect button on the button bar.
o Select Disconnect from the phonebook entry's pop-up menu.
o Select Disconnect from the File menu on the menu bar.
The remote system to which you are connected might also have a "Disconnect"
option.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.31. Drag and Drop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The term drag and drop refers to the technique of moving one or more objects
with your mouse. Specifically, when you use drag and drop in OS/2, you place
your mouse pointer over an object, hold down button 2 (by default, the right
button), and move the mouse pointer to the new location. When you release
button 2, the object drops in the new location.
In HyperACCESS, phonebook entries are OS/2 objects that you can move with drag
and drop. The following list includes some examples of how you can use drag and
drop in HyperACCESS.
o Move (mouse button 2)
- Drag HAO file from OS/2 folder and drop it on phonebook.
Creates new phonebook entry that shows icon and name stored in HAO
file.
- Drag phonebook entry and drop it on OS/2 folder
Removes entry from phonebook and creates a shadow of HAO file (with
generic icon and HAO filename).
- Drag phonebook entry and drop it on another phonebook tab
Moves entry from one phonebook to another.
- Drag New Phonebook Entry Template from one phonebook to another
phonebook tab
Displays Description and Communications dialogs so you can create an
entry in the other phonebook.
- Drag phonebook entry and drop it on Terminal panel tab
Displays Terminal panel and establishes a connection with the remote
system.
- Drag entry from the List panel and drop it on the Terminal panel tab
Places trial call.
- Drag entry from the List panel and drop it on a phonebook panel tab.
Copies the entry from the list to the phonebook.
o Copy (Ctrl+button 2)
- Drag phonebook entry to OS/2 desktop.
Copies HAO file (with generic icon and HAO filename)
o Shadow (Ctrl+Shift+button 2)
- Drag phonebook entry to OS/2 desktop.
Creates shadow of phonebook entry. Double-click to start HyperACCESS
and connect to the remote system.
- Drag phonebook entry to same or other phonebook
Creates shadow of existing phonebook entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.32. Editing Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can use the OS/2 Enhanced Editor (or any other text editor) to edit a text
file, such as a file you've captured to disk or a REXX program file. You can
use the Enhanced Editor at any time. You may also choose to use Message Pad,
particularly if you intend to prepare a message that you'll send as text.
Related Information
Editing Message Pad Text
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.33. Editing Message Pad Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Message Pad window provides a convenient scratch pad area for creating text
you might otherwise type directly to the remote system. The advantage of using
Message Pad is that you can freely move about and edit text using standard OS/2
techniques. You don't have to concern yourself with the idiosyncrasies of
editing on the remote system. With Message Pad, you have a complete text
editing capability without ever leaving HyperACCESS. And using pop-up menus
make using Message Pad especially convenient.
To manually edit text in the Message Pad, you use the same techniques as in the
OS/2 Enhanced Editor and other text editing applications. For example, you can:
o Move the mouse pointer (I-beam) to the beginning of text you want to edit
and click to set the insertion point.
o Perform any of the following operations:
- To insert text at the insertion point, type the text that you want
to insert.
- To delete a character after the insertion point, press the Delete
key.
- To delete a character before the insertion point, press the
Backspace key.
- To delete or replace a block of text, you can:
1. Move the mouse pointer (I-beam) to the beginning of the text.
Press the left mouse button and drag the selection cursor to
select (highlight) the text you want to delete.
2. Then do one of the following:
o To delete the text, select Cut from the pop-up menu, click
the Cut selected text button, select the Edit/Cut menu
choice, or use the cut shortcut key combination
Shift+Delete.
o To replace the highlighted text, select Paste from the
pop-up menu, click the Paste text button, select the
Edit/Paste menu choice, or use the paste shortcut key
combination Shift+Insert.
Related Information
o Copying Text From Message Pad
o Copying Text to Message Pad
o Displaying Message Pad
o Printing Message Pad Text
o Sending Message Pad Text to Host
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.34. Getting Started ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS makes it very easy for you to communicate by modem with another
computer or computer system.
In modem communications, the communications medium is the public telephone
system. Your modem can be internal (inside your computer system unit) or
external (attached by a cable to a connector on the outside of your computer
system unit).
You connect your computer or external modem to your telephone line according to
the directions that came with your equipment. Then, with communications
software (HyperACCESS, for example), you have your modem dial the telephone
number of the other computer. When the connection is made, you hear a
distinctive sound and a communication from the other computer appears on your
screen as text or graphics. Now you can send or receive messages, computer
files, or, (if you have a data/fax modem and fax software), faxes.
An internal modem is a device, often called a card, that fits in a slot inside
your computer. When your computer is turned on, your modem is ready to operate.
An external modem, housed in a plastic case, is connected to your computer with
a cable. An external modem has a switch that you use to turn it on and off. It
also has indicator lights that show the progress of your communications
connection. Modems are rated by the speed at which they transmit data.
HyperACCESS supports modems with speeds of from 300 to 115,200 baud, or bits
per second (bps). For communicating with computer systems such as personal
online and bulletin board services, you should use a modem with a speed of at
least 2400 baud.
When your modem is installed, turned on, and ready to communicate, start
HyperACCESS. Immediately, the Main Phonebook appears on the screen. HyperACCESS
has already set up U.S. telephone numbers for most of the systems you see on
the screen. And CommSense (TM) (patent pending) sets up your modem with
appropriate parity, data bits, and stop bits. All you need to do to connect
with the systems that have these default settings is double-click the icon.
If default settings are not available for some of the systems you want to
communicate with, contact the system administrators for information about
telephone numbers, baud rates, and modem settings. Some systems have local
offices that you can reach by telephone.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.35. Interacting with a Remote System ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When you connect through your modem to another computer or computer system, you
see text or graphics from the other system on the HyperACCESS terminal screen.
The format of the information on the screen and how you interact with it
depends upon the software of the other system. Some systems display menus, and
you make selections. With some systems, the information you receive is
displayed on your screen, but the text you type in response is not displayed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.36. Modifying Communications Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can modify communications settings when you define a new phonebook entry
(from the Communications dialog) or at any other time using the Communications
properties sheet. To modify a connection, follow these steps:
1. With the Communications dialog or Communications properties sheet open,
click the Change... button in the Communications Settings group box. The
Communications Settings dialog is displayed.
2. The Baud Rate group box has two radio buttons that enable you to select
either the default baud rate for the connection or a custom baud rate for
this phonebook entry. To establish a custom baud rate, click the Connect
at radio button and select the baud rate from the drop-down list.
3. The Data, parity, and stop bits drop-down list shows standard settings
plus auto-detect. If you want different settings, and auto-detect doesn't
work in your situation, click the Custom... push button to display the
Custom dialog.
Use this dialog to enter specific values provided by the remote system's
administrator for data, parity, and stop bits per character. Once you've
selected values using the radio buttons for each option, click OK.
Note: After you choose settings and click OK, these settings show up in
the Data, parity, and stop bits drop-down list of the Communications
Settings dialog as "custom." If you later choose a standard setting or
auto-detect from the drop-down list, the custom setting disappears.
4. If necessary, change the Break duration using the drop-down list.
5. If necessary, change the Software Flow Control using the check boxes and
associated character drop-down fields. To enable software flow con- trol
you must select the check box and specify the flow control character. If
a check box is unselected, HyperACCESS ignores the associated character.
6. Click OK in the Communications Settings dialog.
7. Click OK in the Communications dialog (Communications properties sheet).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.37. Modifying a Connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can modify a connection when you define a new phonebook entry (from the
Communications dialog) or at any other time using the Communications properties
sheet.
To modify a connection, follow these steps:
1. With the Communications dialog or Communications properties sheet open,
click the Change... button in the Connect Via group box. The Existing
Connections dialog is displayed.
2. Select the connection you want to modify, and click the Modify
Connection... button. What happens next depends on the type of connection
you select, but is similar to the procedure for new connections.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.38. Modifying Phonebook Entry Defaults ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The New Phonebook Entry Template phonebook entry defines defaults that
HyperACCESS uses whenever you create new phonebook entries. You can access the
settings of this phonebook entry using the following steps:
1. Select the New Phonebook Entry Template entry.
2. Perform one of the following actions to display the New Phonebook Entry
Template settings notebook:
o With the mouse pointer over the New Phonebook Entry Template
phonebook entry, click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button)
to display the pop-up menu. Use the Properties cascade menu to
select the properties sheet you want to display.
o Use the File/Properties cascade menu to select the properties sheet
you want to display.
3. Make changes you want and close the properties notebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.39. Moving a Phonebook Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To move a phonebook entry from one phonebook to another, follow these steps.
1. Select the tab that displays the phonebook panel with the entry you want
to move.
2. Drag the entry (using mouse button 2) to the tab of the phonebook that
you want the entry to appear in. HyperACCESS moves the phonebook entry
without displaying the other phonebook panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.40. Opening the Main Phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
When you start HyperACCESS, the Main Phonebook opens itself. It is displayed on
top of the terminal screen. You can move the phonebook around on the screen and
interact with other elements on the screen as you need to, even while the
phonebook is displayed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.41. Placing a Trial Call From a List Entry ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can place a call from a list file prior to moving it to a phonebook. This
capability lets you see if the system is one that you want to use before
actually storing it in a phonebook. To try an entry, follow these steps:
1. Select the Lists panel tab.
2. If necessary, open a list file by selecting File/Open from the Lists
panel menu. Enter the filename, select a file from the file list, or
click the Browse... button to select an existing file.
3. Select an entry from the list, and do one of the following:
o With the mouse pointer over the selected entry, click button 2 (by
default, the right button) to display the pop-up menu, and select
Place Trial Call from the menu.
o Click the Place trial call button.
o Select File/Place Trial Call.
o Drag the phonebook entry to the Terminal panel tab.
Regardless of the technique you use, HyperACCESS displays the Place
Trial Call dialog and fills in information from the list file. You
can accept the information in this dialog or make any changes you
want.
Note: By default, the phonebook is <None>. If you change the
phonebook, HyperACCESS automatically saves the entry in that
phonebook. If you leave it set to <None>, you can select a phonebook
after you've completed the call. HyperACCESS will prompt you to see
if you want to save the entry when you try to open another entry or
exit HyperACCESS.
4. When you click OK, HyperACCESS displays the Communications dialog so you
can verify settings before proceeding.
5. When you complete your trial call and either try to open another
phonebook entry or exit, HyperACCESS prompts you with a dialog to see if
you want to save the list entry to a phonebook. You'll have a chance to
specify (or change) the phonebook that you want to use.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.42. Printing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS provides four ways to print text. You can:
o Print incoming information as it arrives.
o Print information from the terminal area or Backscroll Buffer after it's
received, or from the Message Pad window before it's sent.
o Some terminal emulators permit the host to issue print commands.
HyperACCESS supports both continuous and selected printing for applicable
terminal emulators (for example, VTxxx).
o Print information from a capture file using another application.
You can use the Terminal panel pop-up or File menu to select either Print or
Capture to Printer to initiate printing at any time, even before HyperACCESS
connects to the remote system. However, before actually printing, you should
make sure that your printer is set up properly.
Changing Printer Setup
You can select a predefined printer using the pop-up or File menu to select
the Print Setup... menu in the following panels:
o Terminal panel
o Call Log panel
o List panel
Printing Incoming Information as It Arrives
You can print your interaction with the host while you're online. To initiate
this type of printing, follow these steps:
1. Verify that your Printer Setup is defined correctly. See Changing Printer
Setup, above, for more information.
2. Verify that your printer is turned on and has plenty of paper.
3. To start printing, perform one of the following actions to display the
Capture to Printer dialog.
o Click the Capture to printer button.
o With the mouse pointer anywhere in the Terminal panel (except over
selected text), click button 2 (by default, the right button) to
display the pop-up menu and select Capture to printer.
o Select File/Capture to printer.
The dialog shows the active printer.
o Select the appropriate option in the Capture Mode group box to
specify what information you want to capture. The buttons provide
the following choices:
- Characters
Captures all incoming data except escape sequences.
- Lines
Captures each line when HyperACCESS receives the CR character
at its end, plus the line you're on when you stop or suspend
capturing (the default).
- Screens
Captures the entire screen whenever the remote system clears
the screen or you stop or suspend capturing.
4. Select the appropriate option in the Print Method group box to specify
when HyperACCESS releases captured data to the printer. The buttons
provide two choices:
o By page
Select this option to print each page as it's received. HyperACCESS
uses information from the system to determine page length.
o By session
When you select this option, HyperACCESS releases data to the
printer after you stop capture or you terminate the communications
session.
5. Click the Start push button to print data using the options you selected.
Printing Information After It's Received
To print a section of the terminal area, Backscroll Buffer, or the Message
Pad, follow these steps:
1. Verify that your printer is turned on and has plenty of paper, and that
your Printer Setup is defined correctly.
2. Select the text to be printed in the terminal area, Backscroll Buffer, or
Message Pad. (If you want to print the entire terminal area and
Backscroll Buffer, you don't need to make a selection.)
3. In the Terminal panel, use the Print selected text button, select
Edit/Copy to Printer or File/Print, or use the pop-up menu. When the
dialog appears, select either All or Selected text from the Print Range
group box, and click OK. HyperACCESS will print the range selected.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.43. Printing Message Pad Text ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To print all text in the Message Pad window by following these steps:
1. Select File/Print to display the Print dialog.
2. Select the All radio button in the Print Range group box, and click the
Print button.
To print selected text from the Message Pad window, make your selection and
then do one of the following:
o Click the Print selected text button.
o Select File/Print and specify Selected text in the Print Range group box
of the Print dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.44. Programming with REXX ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Refer to HyperACCESS User's Manual, Chapter 4, "Programming with REXX."
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.45. Quitting HyperACCESS ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To end your HyperACCESS connection, first disconnect from your communications
connection. Then use one of these methods:
o Double-click the HyperACCESS system menu symbol (at the top left of the
window).
o Click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) on the HyperACCESS
system menu symbol (at the top left of the window). Then select Close.
o Select Exit from the File menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.46. Receiving Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS supports many different file transfer protocols. This section
describes generically how you receive files regardless of the file transfer
protocol selected.
To receive one or more files from a remote system, follow these steps:
1. Use one of the following actions to display the modeless Receive dialog.
o With the mouse pointer anywhere in the Terminal panel, except over
selected text, click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button)
to display the pop-up menu. Then select Receive Files... to display
the dialog.
o Click the Receive files button.
o Select Transfer/Receive... to display the dialog.
2. The Filename or directory to receive into edit field shows the default or
last path used. To change this setting, do one of the following:
o Edit the path in the edit field.
o Select one of the previously received files from the drop-down
history list.
o Click the Browse... push button to select an existing directory.
3. If necessary, use the Transfer protocol drop-down list box to select a
different file transfer protocol. The sending system must be using the
same file transfer protocol.
4. If you need to change settings for the selected file transfer protocol,
click the Settings... push button to see a dialog for the selected
protocol.
5. If the file transfer protocol sends filename information, you can select
the Use received filenames check box, Use received file time/date, and/or
the Use received directories check boxes; otherwise, the check boxes are
grayed out (unavailable).
6. Select one of the options in the If File Already Exists group box. Your
selection causes HyperACCESS to perform various functions when it
receives files. The options are:
o Overwrite
If the file exists, this option deletes the old file and creates a
new file. If the file doesn't exist, it creates the file.
o Append
If the file exists, this option adds newly received data to the end
of the current file. If the file doesn't exist, HyperACCESS creates
it.
o Refuse
If the file exists, this option refuses the remote system's attempt
to transmit a file with the same name.
o Refuse unless newer
If the file exists, this option checks the create/modify date for
the file. If the protocol supports the ability to send a
create/modify date, verify that the file being sent by the remote
system is newer than the one on your system. If it is, HyperACCESS
accepts it. Otherwise, HyperACCESS rejects it.
o Rename using date
HyperACCESS creates filenames by appending the date/sequence to the
original name. The date/sequence format is MMDD999, where MM is the
month (values 01 to 12), DD is the day (values 01 to 31), and 999 is
a sequence number from 000 to 999 for the files created on that
date. If appending the date/sequence creates a filename that is too
long, HyperACCESS deletes the required number of characters from the
end of the original name to fit the date/sequence.
o Rename sequentially
Appends a sequence number from 0 to 999 to the end of the filename.
If the name is already at its maximum length (254 or 8), the
sequence number replaces characters at the end of the name.
7. Type commands to the remote system to send the files. (Commands vary from
system to system.) When the remote system is ready, click the Receive
push button. This action causes HyperACCESS to enter receive mode and
displays the Receive Progress dialog.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix E, File Transfer Protocols
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.47. Reviewing Received Information ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
With the Backscroll Buffer, you can review information that you have received
on your terminal screen that has already scrolled up out of your ordinary view.
To see the scrolled text, press the up arrow in the vertical scroll bar on the
right of your terminal screen. Or drag the slider bar upward. (On many
computers, you can also press the Page Up key.)
You can select information in the Backscroll Buffer for printing or pasting to
the host computer.
The HyperACCESS Backscroll Buffer holds a maximum of 5000 lines.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.48. Selecting Fonts ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To change the name, style, and size of the type fonts on your screen or in
printouts, select the Fonts tab on the Properties notebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.49. Selecting a Terminal Emulator ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To select a terminal emulator for a communications connection, select the
Terminal Emulator tab on the Properties notebook.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.50. Selecting ASCII Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To select ASCII settings for a communications connection, do one of the
following:
o Click the Settings button on the button bar and then select ASCII
receiving... or ASCII sending....
o Select ASCII receiving... or ASCII sending from the Properties menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.51. Selecting Communications Settings ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To specify the phone number, port, and modem settings for a communications
connection, click the Settings button on the button bar or select
Communications... from the Properties menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.52. Sending Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS provides straightforward methods for sending files to a remote
system using whatever protocol that system has available. The simplest
technique requires that you send one file at a time. However, most file
transfer protocols supported by HyperACCESS can send groups of files.
The following sections describe, generically, how you send files regardless of
the file transfer protocol selected.
You can send one file or a group of files, which you select using wildcards,
following these steps:
1. Issue commands to the remote system to receive files from you. Commands
vary from system to system.
Note: You can delay this step until just before step 5.
2. Use one of the following actions to display the modeless Send dialog.
o With the mouse pointer anywhere in the Terminal panel except over
selected text, click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button)
to display the pop-up menu. Then select Send Files... to display the
dialog.
o Click the Send files button.
o Select Transfer/Send... to display the dialog.
3. Enter a filename with its full path in the Filename edit field, or click
the Browse... push button to select a file.
Filenames you enter in the edit field can include wildcards. In this
case, HyperACCESS sends each file in the specified path that satisfies
the wildcard selection.
Note: If you select the Include matching files from subdirectories check
box, HyperACCESS also searches subdirectories of the specified path for
matching files.
4. If necessary, use the Transfer protocol drop-down list box to select a
different file transfer protocol. The receiving system must be using the
same file transfer protocol.
5. Click the Send button. This action causes HyperACCESS to enter send mode
and displays the Send Progress dialog.
Related Information
HyperACCESS User's Manual, Appendix E, File Transfer Protocols
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.53. Sending Message Pad Text to Host ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Once you've completed entering and editing text in the Message Pad window,
you'll want to send it to the remote system. To do this, click the Send! menu
on the menu bar or the Send text button. This action causes HyperACCESS to send
the contents of the Message Pad as if a very fast typist were keying the data.
Settings specified in the ASCII Sending properties sheet control how text is
sent.
Note: The Send text button sends selected text or, if no text is selected,
sends all text on the Message Pad.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.54. Specifying a Phonebook Entry's Name and Icon ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To specify a name and icon for a remote system, click the Settings button on
the button bar or select Description... from the Properties menu.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.55. Specifying How Keys Are To Be Used ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To specify how certain keys are to be used in a communications connection, use
the Terminal Emulator sheet of the Properties Notebook. You can specify the
behavior of the function, arrow, and Ctrl keys; the key or key combination that
the Backspace key sends; and the appearance of the cursor.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.56. Specifying Modem Commands ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To specify modem commands in addition to the defaults set by HyperACCESS, take
the following steps:
1. Click the Settings button on the button bar or select Communications ...
from the File/Properties menu.
2. On the Communications page of the Properties Notebook, select the Dialing
Details button. The Dialing Details dialog is displayed.
3. Enter the modem commands in the Extra modem setup commands box. If you
need help with these commands, refer to your modem manual or contact the
administrator of the remote system you are going to communicate with.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.57. Starting Communications Sessions From the Desktop ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You canstart communications sessions by simply clicking an icon on your
desktop. To use this option, create a phonebook entry or use one of the
predefined phonebook entries. Then follow these steps:
1. If necessary, start HyperACCESS.
2. Select the phonebook panel tab for the phonebook that has the entry you
want on your desktop.
3. Press Ctrl+Shift and press mouse button 2 (by default, the right button)
on the phonebook entry you want on your desktop.
4. Drag the phonebook entry icon anywhere on the OS/2 desktop. This action
creates a shadow of the phonebook entry that automatically launches
HyperACCESS and dials the remote system. The shadow shows the generic
HyperACCESS icon and the HAO filename.
5. With the icon on the desktop, you can start HyperACCESS and establish a
connection with that phonebook entry, by simply double-clicking your new
icon.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.58. Stopping, Pausing, and Resuming Printing ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Once you've initiated printing operations for a session, selecting File/Capture
to printer displays a cascade menu with the following choices:
o Stop
Stops capturing data for the printer and closes the printer connection,
enabling the spooler to release the information to the printer.
Pause
Suspends capturing data for the printer, but doesn't close the printer
connection. If the printer is already paused, this menu choice is grayed
out (unavailable).
o Resume
Restarts capturing data for the printer using the current printer
connection. If the printer is already active, this menu choice is grayed
out (unavailable).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.59. Stopping, Pausing, and Resuming Text Capture ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Once a capture has been initiated, selecting File/Capture to File displays a
cascade menu with the following choices:
o Stop
Stops file capture and closes the current capture file.
o Pause
Suspends file capture, but doesn't close the current capture file. If
capture is already paused, this menu item is grayed out (unavailable).
o Resume
Restarts file capture using the current capture file. If capture is
already active, this menu item is grayed out (unavailable).
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.60. Uninstalling HyperACCESS for OS/2 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To remove HyperACCESS from your system, open the HyperACCESS folder and
double-click the Uninstall icon. This program performs the following functions:
o Removes changes to CONFIG.SYS and OS2.INI from the PC on which Uninstall
is being run.
o Deletes contents of the program directory associated with this installed
copy of HAOS2, unless the files were placed there by another installation
of HAOS2 (or the directory is write-protected).
o Deletes contents of the data directory associated with this installed
copy of HAOS2. If you want to keep your phonebook entry files, you must
make backup copies before running Uninstall.
o Deletes all desktop objects associated with this installation of HAOS2.
o Leaves any files that you have placed in the transfer and Lists
directories, and leaves the HAOS2 directory structure intact, so that you
can still reach those files.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.61. Upgrading from HyperACCESS Lite ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can directly import HyperACCESS Lite for OS/2 phonebook entries into this
full version of HyperACCESS. Follow these steps:
1. Start the HyperACCESS Conversion Program in the HyperACCESS for OS/2
folder.
2. Select File/Convert from HyperACCESS Lite.
3. In the window titled Select HyperACCESS Lite Files, find the HALITE
directory and then select the files you want to import (they have HAL
extensions).
4. When you have selected the files to import, click OK. An information
message is displayed telling you the files have been converted.
5. Start HyperACCESS for OS/2.
6. Select the phonebook panel File/Import... menu choice.
7. Select the files you converted from HALite (they now have HAO
extensions).
8. Click OK. Your converted, imported phonebook entries appear in the
phonebook panel.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.62. Upgrading from HyperACCESS/5 ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Although none of HyperACCESS/5's files are directly compatible, you can convert
its System List entries into HyperACCESS for OS/2 phonebook entries. Follow
these steps:
1. Export the systems from HyperACCESS/5 as described in its manual.
2. Use the HyperACCESS Conversion Program included with HyperACCESS for OS/2
to create HAO files.
3. Use the phonebook panel File/Import... menu choice to assign each
imported HAO file to a phonebook entry with an associated icon and host
entry name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.63. Upgrading from Procomm ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Use the HyperACCESS Conversion Program provided with HyperACCESS to convert
dialing directories from Procomm Plus for Windows, Procomm Plus 1.x (DOS),
Procomm Plus 2.x (DOS), or Procomm (DOS shareware) into HyperACCESS HAO
phonebook entries. Then use the phonebook panel File/Import... menu choice to
assign each imported HAO file to a phonebook entry with an associated icon and
host entry name.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.64. Using List Files ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
HyperACCESS comes with several lists of bulletin board systems that you can
connect to. In addition, you can download other lists from various bulletin
board systems and online services, or export lists from contact programs and
personal information managers (PIMs). Some of these lists are very large (for
example, the FIDO list is 3 MB).
To copy one or more entries from a list file to a phonebook, you must first
define a template if one doesn't already exist. If you're using one of the list
files that come with HyperACCESS, the templates already exist.
Once you've established your list file template, follow these steps:
1. Select the Lists tab to display the Lists panel. HyperACCESS displays the
last list file you selected. If this is your first time in this panel, or
you want to use a different list file, select File/Open... to display a
standard file selection dialog. HyperACCESS puts the list files in a
LISTS directory. Open this directory and then open the list file you
want.
2. Select one or more entries in the list using standard mouse or keyboard
selection techniques.
3. Copy the entries to a phonebook by doing one of the following to display
the Description dialog:
o Double-click or click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button)
on an entry to display the Lists panel pop-up menu. Then select the
Copy to Phonebook... menu choice.
o Click the Copy to Phonebook button.
o Drag the entries onto the phonebook tab desired.
4. HyperACCESS displays the Description dialog with the entry name from the
list. You can change the name and phonebook, and select an icon. When you
click OK, you see the Communications dialog with the phone number and
other information from the list.
5. You can change the phone number or any other settings. Click OK when you
are ready to accept the settings.
6. Now you can use this phonebook entry from a list as you would any other
entry.
If you want to place a trial call before copying an entry to a phonebook, do
one of the following:
o Click button 2 (by default, the right button) on the entry to display its
pop-up menu. Then select Place trial call.
o Click the Place trial callbutton.
o Select Place trial call. from the File menu.
Related Information
Creating a List File Template
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.65. Using Message Pad Chat Mode ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The Message Pad is convenient for chat mode operations when you're
communicating with another individual on the remote system. With Message Pad
set to Chat Mode, you can compose what you want to send while the Terminal
panel displays what the other party sends you.
To use Message Pad in Chat Mode, follow these steps:
1. From the Terminal panel, click the Message Pad button or select
View/Message Pad to display the Message Pad window.
2. From the Message Pad window, select Options/Chat Mode to enable Chat Mode
operations. When selected, Chat Mode has a check mark.
3. With Chat Mode enabled, the Message Pad transmits the contents of the
window whenever you press Enter.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.66. Using New Phonebook Entry Template ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The New Phonebook Entry Template is intended only for creating new phonebook
entries, not for connecting with remote systems. For this reason, its behavior
is different from regular phonebook entries. For example, when you double-click
a regular entry (or drag and drop it on the Terminal tab), HyperACCESS loads
its settings on the Terminal panel and establishes a connection. But when you
double-click the New Phonebook Entry Template, HyperACCESS merely loads its
settings, without establishing a connection.
The following information summarizes what you can do with the New Phonebook
Entry Template.
o New
Selecting New first displays the Description dialog, then the
Communications dialog, so you can enter information for the new phonebook
entry. You can select New from pop-up menus, including the New Phonebook
Entry Template's pop-up; from the New button on a button bar, or from a
File menu. You can also drag and drop the New Phonebook Entry Template on
the same or another phonebook, with the same result.
o Open
Selecting Open displays the Terminal panel and opens the New Phonebook
Entry Template. You can select Open by any of these methods:
- Double-click on the New Phonebook Entry Template icon.
- Drag and drop the New Phonebook Entry Template onto the Terminal
tab.
- Select the New Phonebook Entry Template and click the Open button.
- Select the New PHonebook Entry Template and then select Open from a
pop-up menu on the phonebook or Terminal panel.
- Select the New Phonebook Entry Template and then select Open from a
File menu.
o Save As
Selecting Save As from the File menu either on a phonebook panel or the
Terminal panel (with the New Phonebook Entry Template highlighted)
creates a new phonebook entry, displaying the Description dialog.
Selecting either Delete or Connect displays a message saying you cannot delete
or establish a connection with the New Phonebook Entry Template.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.67. Using Pop-Up Menus ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Pop-up menus (sometimes called context menus) appear next to the objects they
are associated with. You click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) on
an object to display its pop-up menu. Pop-up menu choices are appropriate for
the object in its current context.
In HyperACCESS, pop-up menus provide an additional technique for performing
commonly used functions. You can access all items in HyperACCESS pop-up menus
through menu bar selections or the button bar (if it's displayed). The
advantage of pop-up menus is that they are right there at the object you're
working with. The pop-up menu is just one mouse-click away, and it contains
only those options pertinent to your present operation/object.
Using Phonebook Panel Pop-up Menus
There are two different phonebook panel pop-up menus:
o Over a phonebook entry
o Over a blank space in the phonebook panel.
Phonebook Entry Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up that appears when you hold the mouse pointer over a phonebook entry
and click mouse button 2 displays the following items:
o New
Creates a new phonebook entry.
o Open
Displays the Terminal panel.
o Connect
Displays the Terminal panel, connects the port, and dials the phone
number.
o Connect and record logon
Displays the Terminal panel, displays the Recording in Progress window,
connects the port, dials the phone number,and records interaction with
the remote system for later automatic logons.
o Connect but skip logon
Displays the Terminal panel, connects the port, and dials the phone
number. Use this selection when you have an automatic logon recorded and
don't want to use it.
o Delete
Deletes the selected phonebook entry. Selecting Delete displays a warning
dialog with the following choices:
- Remove from phonebook
Removes the entry from thephonebook, but doesn't delete its file
from the disk.
- Delete from disk
Removes the entry from the phonebook and deletes its file from the
disk.
o Properties
Displays the Properties notebook so you can change settings.
Phonebook Panel Pop-Up Menu
The pop-up menu that appears when you click (or press) mouse button 2 on a
blank area on the phone panel displays the following items:
o Refresh now
Redisplays the phonebook. Use this selection when phonebook entry files
are added or deleted outside HyperACCESS.
o Icons
Displays the icons view of the phonebook.
o Details
Displays the details view of the phonebook.
o Entry names
Displays the entry names view of the phonebook.
o File names
Displays the file names view of the phonebook.
o Button bar
When checked, displays the button bar on the phonebook panel.
o Status bar
When checked, displays the status bar at the bottom of the phonebook
panel.
o Modem LEDs
When checked, displays the modem lights at the bottom left of the
phonebook panel.
o Panel tabs
When checked, displays the phonebook panel tabs across the bottom of the
phonebook panel.
Terminal Area/Backscroll Buffer Pop-Up Menus
HyperACCESS displays one of two different pop-up menus when you click mouse
button 2 in the terminal area or Backscroll Buffer of the Terminal panel. The
menu depends on whether:
o The mouse pointer is over selected text.
o The mouse pointer is on a blank space in the terminal area or Backscroll
Buffer of the Terminal panel.
Over Selected Text
When the mouse pointer is over selected text, the pop-up menu has the
following items:
o Copy to Clipboard
Copies selected text to the Clipboard.
o Copy to host
Copies selected text to the host.
o Copy to host with <ENTER>
Copies selected text to the host and sends a carriage return and,
optionally, line feed character. (Depending on settings in the ASCII
Sending properties sheet.)
o Copy to Message Pad
Copies selected text to the Message Pad window.
o Copy to printer
Copies selected text to the printer.
o Copy to file...
Copies selected text to a file you specify using the Copy to File dialog.
You can enter a filename in the edit field or use the Browse... push
button to select a file.
o Find...
Displays the Find dialog. The Find What edit field contains the selected
text. Find searches the terminal area or Backscroll Buffer of the
Terminal panel.
Over Blank Space
When you click mouse button 2 over blank space in the terminal area or
Backscroll Buffer, rather than over selected text, the pop-up menu has the
following items:
o Receive file...
Displays the Receive dialog.
o Send file...
Displays the Send dialog.
o Print...
Displays a dialog that you use to print just the terminal area or include
the Backscroll Buffer.
o Print setup...
Displays a dialog that you use to select a printer.
o Capture to printer
The Capture to Printer cascade menu has items to Start, Stop, Pause, and
Resume capturing text to the printer.
o Capture to file
The Capture to File cascade menu has items to Start, Stop, Pause, and
Resume capturing information to a file.
o Paste to host
Transmits text in the Clipboard to the host system.
o Paste from file...
Copies selected text from a file you specify using the Paste from File
dialog. You can enter a filename in the editfield or use the Browse...
push button to select a file.
Once you select a file, HyperACCESS transmits its contents to the host
system. This is the same as selecting Transfer/ Send using Text Send
protocol.
o Select terminal screen
Selects (highlights) the contents of the terminal area. You can copy
selected text to the Clipboard, Message Pad, or a file.
o Select All
Selects (highlights) the contents of the terminal area and Backscroll
Buffer. You can copy selected text to the Clipboard, Message Pad, the
host, or a file.
o Find...
Displays the Find dialog. Find limits its search to the terminal area or
Backscroll Buffer of the Terminal panel.
Message Pad Pop-Up Menus
HyperACCESS displays one of two different pop-up menus when you click mouse
button 2 (by default, the right button) in the Message Pad window. The menu
depends on whether:
o The mouse pointer is over selected text.
o The mouse pointer is over blank space in the Message Pad window.
Over Selected Text
When the mouse pointer is over selected text, the pop-up menu has the
following items:
- Undo
Available after a cut or paste operation. Reverses the last
operation.
- Cut
Copies selected text to the Clipboard and deletes the text from the
Message Pad window.
- Cut to Host
Transmits selected text to the remote system and deletes the text
from the Message Pad window. With all text in the Message Pad window
selected, this is the same as clicking the Message Pad's Send! menu.
- Copy
Copies selected text to the Clipboard.
- Copy to
Displays a cascade menu so you can copy selected text to the host,
printer, or file.
- Paste to Message Pad
Replaces selected text with text contained in the Clipboard.
- Paste from file...
Copies selected text from a file you specify using the Paste from
File dialog. You can enter a filename in the edit field or use the
Browse... push button to select a file.
Once you select a file, its contents are copied to the Message Pad
replacing the selected text.
- Find...
Displays the Find dialog. The Find What edit field con- tains the
selected text. Find limits its search to the Message Pad window.
- Close Message Pad
Closes the Message Pad window without transmitting or removing its
contents.
Over Blank Space
When you click mouse button 2 over a blank space in the Message Pad,
the pop-up menu has the following items:
- Undo
Available after a cut or paste operation. Reverses the last
operation.
- Clear
Deletes the contents of the Message Pad and leaves the window open.
- Paste to Message Pad
Inserts text contained in the Clipboard at the current insertion
point.
- Paste from file...
Copies selected text from a file you specify using the Paste from
File dialog. You can enter a filename in the edit field or use the
Browse... push button to select a file.
Once you select a file, its contents are copied to the Message Pad
at the current insertion point.
- Find...
Displays the Find dialog. Find limits its search to the Message Pad
window.
- Close Message Pad
Closes the Message Pad window without transmitting or removing its
contents.
Button Bar Pop-Up Menus
When you click mouse button 2 (by default, the right button) on any button in
a button bar, HyperACCESS displays the button bar pop-up menu. The choices
that appear in this menu are:
o Modify
Displays the Button dialog with the current settings for the button. Use
this selection to change the definition of a button's action,or how it's
displayed.
o New
Displays the Button dialog. Use this selection to create a new button.
o Copy
This selection displays the Button dialog with the currentbutton's
settings as defaults. You can modify any settings to create a similar
button.
o Delete
Displays a warning dialog for confirmation and then deletes the current
button.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 6.68. Using Queued Calling ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You can select multiple phonebook entries and have HyperACCESS call each entry
in turn. This feature is called queued calling..
To initiate queued calling, follow these steps:
1. Select the phonebook entries you want to call. (Hold down the Ctrl key
while you select the entries.)
2. Tell HyperACCESS to start calling by doing one of the following:
o Click button 2 (by default, the right button) on one of the selected
entries to display its pop-up menu. Then click Connect.
o Click the Dial button on the button bar.
o Drag the highlighted entries to the Terminal tab. (Point to one,
press the right button, and hold it down as you drag. All
highlighted icons will move at the same time.)
o Select Connect from the File menu.
HyperACCESS then attempts to connect to each entry in turn, making one
connection attempt with each entry. When an entry successfully connects, it is
dropped from the queue. After all entries have been tried once, the program
goes through the queue again, trying to connect to any systems that failed to
connect earlier. Each entry is dropped from the queue when it connects, or
after the number of dialing attempts specified in that entry's Dialing Details
dialog.
Each time a call connects, you may interact with that system as you would
during any other call to that system.
At the conclusion of each call (when you disconnect), a dialog pops up for
five seconds, summarizing the number of queued calls completed and remaining.
This dialog includes a Cancel button and a button that you can toggle between
Pause! and Resume!. If you select Cancel, all remaining queued calls are
canceled. (If you select Cancel in the Connect dialog that appears during
dialing, only that call is canceled, with no effect on remaining queued calls.
Note: If you minimize HyperACCESS, queued calling progresses without the
five-second pause between calls. You can do other things while HyperACCESS is
making your queued calls.
You cannot place a new call between queued calls, because the queued call
dialog that appears at that time is modal.
If you attempt to place a call while a queued call is still connected, the
usual "Do you want to disconnect" message appears. If you answer Yes, the
current call disconnects, and the phonebook entry you just selected is called.
Queued calling resumes after that call is completed.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7. Messages ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A list of HyperACCESS for OS/2 messages.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.1. Modem Difficulty ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Your modem might have displayed an error message for the following reasons.
(Most likely causes are listed first.)
Possible Cause - You selected an unsuitable modem name from the modem
list on the Connection dialog.
Remedy - Return to the Connection dialog and try selecting a different
modem name.
Possible Cause - You entered a modem setup command that your modem does
not recognize.
Remedy - Check your modem manual and then correct the setup strings you
entered in the Connection and/or Dialing Details dialog.
Possible Cause - Your modem is responding erratically.
Remedy - Turn the modem off and back on again. (With internal modems this
requires turning off the computer.) Then try dialing again.
Possible Cause - You are using a baud rate at which your modem is unable
to accept commands.
Remedy - Check your modem manual and then set an appropriate baud rate on
the Connection and/or Dialing Details dialog.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.2. Modem Off ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
A modem can appear to be turned off or disconnected for the following reasons.
(Most likely causes are listed first.)
Possible Cause - Your modem is actually connected to a different port
from the one specified.
Remedy - Use the Connect Through dialog to select the correct
communications port.
Possible Cause - You are using a baud rate that your modem does not
support.
Remedy - Check your modem manual and then set an appropriate baud rate on
the Connection and/or Dialing Details dialog.
Possible Cause - Your modem cable is disconnected or is defective.
Remedy - Reconnect the cable or try another cable.
Possible Cause - Your modem is turned off.
Remedy - Turn your modem on and be sure its power supply is plugged into
an AC outlet (applies to external modems only).
Possible Cause - Your modem is responding erratically.
Remedy - Turn the modem off and back on again. (With internal modems this
requires turning off the computer.) Then try dialing again.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.3. Modem Not Responding ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Your modem appears to be receiving and displaying the modem setup commands
HyperACCESS is issuing, but is failing to respond to them. It is neither saying
OK to accept them, nor ERROR to reject them. This might occur for the following
reasons.
Possible Cause - Your modem is responding erratically.
Remedy - Turn the modem off and back on again. (With internal modems this
requires turning off the computer.) Then try dialing again.
Possible Cause - You are using a baud rate at which your modem is unable
to respond to commands.
Remedy - Check your modem manual and then set an appropriate baud rate on
the Connection and/or Dialing Details dialog.
Possible Cause - Your modem might already be online with a remote system.
Remedy - To make your modem hang up, type +++ on the terminal screen,
pause a moment, then type ATH and press Enter. Then try the call again.
Possible Cause - The specified port has a device other than a modem
connected to it.
Remedy - Select Connect Via from the Communications properties sheet, and
then select an appropriate connection.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.4. Modem - No Dial Tone ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Your modem refuses to dial because it cannot detect the presence of a dial
tone. This might occur for the following reasons.
Possible Cause - Your modem is disconnected from the phone line or
connected incorrectly.
Remedy - Verify that the correct jack on your modem is connected to your
telephone service using an appropriate cable.
Possible Cause - Your phone line is dead.
Remedy - Connect a telephone to the line, pick up the receiver, and
listen for the dial tone. If you hear none, contact the phone company.
Possible Cause - Your phone system provides no conventional dial tone
until you issue certain touch tones, such as a 9.
Remedy - To make the modem dial without a dial tone, enter the modem
setup command "X3" in the Dialing Details or Connection dialog. Issue the
necessary touch tones, such as a dialing prefix, or add them to the
telephone number.
Possible Cause - Your modem and phone line are incompatible. (Most often
encountered with digital phone systems in offices and hotels.)
Remedy - Consult the phone system and modem documentation to determine
compatibility. Check with manufacturers for availability of adapters.
Possible Cause - Another device or person is already using the phone
line. (Applies to phone systems with first-come, first-served phone line
sharing.)
Remedy - Try calling later, when the line becomes available. Or check
Retry automatically if no dial tone in the Dialing Details dialog, to
redial repeatedly, as you would for a busy signal.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.5. Remove selected entries from this phonebook only, or ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
delete those entry files from your disk as well?
If you select Remove from Phonebook and later want to retrieve the entries, you
can do so by using the File/Import menu choice. However, if you select Delete
from Disk, the entries are permanently removed from this phonebook and any
other phonebooks in which they appear.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.6. Do you want to change this one phonebook entry from the ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
previous connection to the new connection? Or do you want to change all
phonebook entries that use the previous connection?
The Just this Entry choice gives you the convenience of being able to create
one or more individual phonebook entries that use different connections from
the rest of the entries in the phonebook. For example, you might want a single
entry for accessing a host computer through a direct cable connection, while
you continue to use the rest of your phonebook entries for calling out through
a modem.
The All Entries choice is appropriate if, for example, you are changing to a
new modem, moving your modem from one port to another, or switching to a
different modem in a modem pool. It enables you to switch all phonebook entries
from the former default connection to a new default connection, so you don't
have to switch each phonebook entry individually.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.7. You cannot establish a connection using the New ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Phonebook Entry Template.
The New Phonebook Entry Template is used for creating other new phonebook
entries, which use settings defined in the New Phonebook Entry Template. You
may open the New Phonebook Entry Template to change its settings, but cannot
connect with or delete this special-purpose phonebook entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.8. You cannot delete the New Phonebook Entry Template. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The New Phonebook Entry Template is used for creating other new phonebook
entries, which use settings defined in the New Phonebook Entry Template. You
may open the New Phonebook Entry Template to change its settings, but you
cannot connect with or delete this special-purpose phonebook entry.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.9. You have an existing key which is identical. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You attempted to make a key assignment, but there is already a key assigned to
that function.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.10. Help not written yet. ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Help for this item hasn't been written yet.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.11. User data required ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
To continue with HyperACCESS Setup, you must enter your name and the serial
number of your copy of HyperACCESS for OS/2. You can find the serial number on
the registration card in your HyperACCESS package or on the label of
HyperACCESS for OS/2 disk 1.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.12. Invalid serial number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The serial number you entered is not correct. Check the serial number on the
registration card in your HyperACCESS package or on the label of HyperACCESS
for OS/2 disk 1. Then enter the serial number again in the Serial number field.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.13. Expired serial number ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The serial number you entered has expired. Enter the serial number that appears
on the registration card in your HyperACCESS package or on the label of
HyperACCESS for OS/2 disk 1. If you need assistance, contact Hilgraeve.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.14. Invalid directory ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
Directory names you entered for upload and download directories are not
correct. Check the paths and enter the directory names again.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.15. Confirm exit ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
If you want to quit Setup, click OK or press the Enter key.
If you want to continue Setup, click Cancel or press the Esc key.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.16. Copy multiple entries to phonebook ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
You selected more than 20 list entries to copy to a phonebook. These entries
will take up considerable storage space on your hard disk. If you want to copy
all these entries, click OK or press the Enter key.
If you do not want to copy all these entries, click Cancel or press the Esc
key. Then you can deselect some or all entries, as you wish.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.17. Default connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The connection information for this phonebook entry is not complete (see
Connect Via group box). HyperACCESS will attempt to make the connection, based
on default connection information.
If you want to complete the information, select the Change... button in the
Connect Via group box.
ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ 7.18. New Phonebook Entry Connection ΓòÉΓòÉΓòÉ
The selected connection is assigned to the New Phonebook Entry Template and
cannot be deleted.
The New Phonebook Entry Template is used for creating other new phonebook
entries. You may modify the New Phonebook Entry Template but you cannot connect
with or delete this special-purpose phonebook entry.